#i think everyone should watch the good place at least *once* in their lifetime. the way i sobbed when i watched that finale... god...
Explore tagged Tumblr posts
the-eclectic-wonderer · 5 months ago
Note
if you happen to enjoy any other sitcoms (tgg can be included here), what are your top 5 favs?
If not: top 5 fav TV series in general?
I do enjoy sitcoms in general, yeah! TGG is obviously in the top spot haha (both as a sitcom and as a TV series in general, it's my all-time favourite!!), but that feels a bit like cheating, so have my top 6 sitcoms instead:
The Golden Girls
Derry Girls
Life With Elizabeth
One Day At A Time (2017)
Bewitched (1964)
Casa Vianello
This last one is an Italian sitcom that was really popular when I was a kid, and it's a riot! It's the everyday life of an old married couple who bicker all day and all night but love each other to bits. The main actors were married and very in love in real life too -- to the point that they died within months of one another. They were one of Italy's most beloved famous couples.
Just for kicks (and because I like listing things!), have also my top 5 non-sitcom shows:
Only Murders In The Building
The Good Place
Good Omens
Crazy Ex-Girlfriend
Boris
This last one is Italian as well! It's a very funny satire show that pokes fun at Italian TV networks. Extremely quotable.
Thank you for the question!! You made me realize I should rewatch a few of these, haha!
[Ask me my Top 5 anything]
4 notes · View notes
analyticalstarz · 24 days ago
Text
The moment that everyone has been waiting for, I present; why I think Rui is autistic, or at the very least, neurodivergent, the sequel!!! This is the second part to this post that I made a few months ago, so feel free to check it out if you want. - 1. For starters, I would like to talk more about Revival My Dream, as it provided a lot to work with. When Rui asks his mom if he really is different from the other children because that was what his peers and teachers had been calling him due to his intelligence, she agrees and says that he is different from the other kids without specifically using the word "smarter", which suggests that his eccentricities and isolation did not come from his high intelligence alone.
Tumblr media
Upon reassuring him that it's alright to be different and sympathizing with his situation, her advice to him was to simply cherish the things that he likes and he would soon find people who support and accept him for him, rather than about his intellectual prowess being in use.
Tumblr media Tumblr media
Following this, an interview that he watches, which ends up significantly impacting his mindset concerning shows, uses the term "minorities" among other examples of audiences to express that people can share the feelings that shows invoke no matter how different they are. This wording can imply that he is also a sort of minority, too.
Tumblr media Tumblr media
(tl by Arvon Oven on YouTube) - 2. He's blunt / straightforward and struggles to empathize with people. His bluntness is more noticeable during the rare occasions that he's upset at somebody else, with the Main Story and Smile Of a Dreamer being examples of this.
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
(first screenshot taken from the global version of Project SEKAI; tl by Caramel Subs on YouTube)
There's also a segment during A Once-In-A-Lifetime Pandemonium!? where Taniyama expresses his envy at Rui getting such good scores on tests, which he responds to by saying that it is indeed nice because it means that he can focus more on shows. Taniyama then exclaims that he should at least be more humble.
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
(tl by tsukasa's #3 fan on YouTube; video is unlisted)
The second point is quite downplayed. Once again returning to Revival My Dream, when he proposes that he and his classmates make a show together that includes one of them jumping out of a second story window to a nearby tree, he's unable to understand why they're so afraid, and even jumps out of the window himself without any safety precautions in place aside from a safety mat to prove that it was safe.
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
(tl by Arvon Oven on YouTube) I was going to add more but forgot what, so that is it I fear !!! thank you for attending my yap session
52 notes · View notes
pandorasword · 2 years ago
Note
I loved Loved LOVED the chaeri and hongjong post! Their relationship is so cute 🤭 The part with ateez talking about chaeri in their daily life was so good! (Only if you want to, of course) Can we see more hongjoong and chaeri moments, as well as ateez and chaeri pls 🙏
Chaeri as the 8th and youngest member of BTS.
CHAERI'S MASTERLIST
N.D Thank you so much! I really appreciate it! I enjoy a lot writing about Chaeri and Ateez Hope you like this ♡
What you find on the web if you google 'Chaeri and Ateez?' + a short extract from one of Chaeri and Hongjoong's first dates
Tumblr media Tumblr media
some clips in a rush ⸻ 🎬
Tumblr media Tumblr media
"Alright, alright, I won't rain on your parade. But if you're going to imitate me, at least let me join"
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
Joong "You are not affected at all" Chaeri "Kinda used to it I would say"
Tumblr media Tumblr media
Joong "Since she spends a lot of time in the dorm, the guys started joking that we are kind of the parents of the group" *smiling through the pain* "And we decided to make a list to estimate who is the easiest and hardest to raise"
Yunho "I will definitely be at the bottom of the list. I am one of her favourites."
ධ Fire mouth
Seoul; 2022
"In my defence, I didn't think they were that spicy." She took one last sip from the now-drained bottle of water they had been forced to buy on the street. They had passed by a Mexican food takeaway and were struck by a container of what looked like kettle corn. How did the diner call it? "I will never eat Esquites from that restaurant again, my tongue is still on fire." Esquites, right. "You can't deny that they still had something … addicting".
Hongjoong closed the door behind them as they crossed the threshold of his dorms. They had agreed to go back there for a few hours as neither of them would have to wake up too early the next day. Chaeri, however, had made it clear she didn't want to stay overnight there, and he respected that.
"Addicting if you like hurting yourself"
Chaeri smiled entertained. "So whiny Joong, I probably should have brought Wooyoung instead of you. He'd have been a good kid and eaten everything." "Do you enjoy trying to make people jealous or is it one of your qualities that you only show off to me?" She placed the bag she was carrying on her shoulder right next to her on the sofa "Would you get jealous if I say I do it with everyone?"
He couldn't hold back a smile as he looked at her. So confident all the time, with that challenging stare, she drove him crazy.
"What are you staring at?" She crossed her legs and made herself more comfortable on the pillows around. "Actually, I can’t take my eyes off you"
He knew. Chaeri told him, not in the slightest detail, that a relationship she previously had did not allow her to feel free to be with other men and that, with him, everything was coming up so naturally that it terrified her. If only he had not seen how her eyes changed every time a certain line was crossed between them, he would never have believed that Chaeri - famous for facing everything bravely - was afraid to let herself go in a relationship.
The conversation they had as soon as the 'fake date' thing was turning into something more was constantly on his mind: "I don't know if I will ever be able to love someone as I did with him. I am not even sure if I will be able to love at all, someone other than him. But I needed to be clear with you. I like you..for real, but I can't guarantee that I will fall in love"
"I like you, Chaeri. And if you give me the opportunity to be close to you for a while, maybe you will understand that love is not just once in a lifetime. I won't be a liar telling you that I'm only speaking for your own interest. Call me selfish, but I want a chance with you."
And she was genuinely impressed. Hongjoong was not the usual boy, false moralist, who would try to manipulate her with his gentle ways to achieve his ends. He was human and not afraid to show it.
"I like to watch you too, Joong."
"Let's take a better look of each other, then."
He stood before her to offer a hand. He brought her close to one of the living room windows to let her face be naturally illuminated by the stars in the sky.
Ethereal. It was the only word that gave her justice at that moment. As the moonlight illuminated her eyes, the boy thought he had never seen a more perfect person than her. He would have taken a photo to cherish the memory forever but he had nothing with him to do so.
He placed a finger on her chin and ran it up to her lips, tracing their outline gently, almost as if the fingertip were a phantom touch on her skin
"Is it ok if I do that?" "You have already kissed me several times, Joong" "True, but it always feels like the first one" "Is it bad?" "No, quite the opposite"
He leaned in, slowly bringing his lips to hers.
At first, the kiss was gentle, a soft brushing of lips against lips. But as the passion between them grew, the kiss deepened. His arms wrapped around her body, pulling her closer as they lost themselves in the moment.
He could feel on his tongue again the tingling of the Esquites still burning hot in Chaeri's mouth, probably 'cause she'd eaten far more than him.
You can't deny that they still had something … addicting Addicting if you like hurting yourself
It seems he was clearly someone who liked to hurt himself.
134 notes · View notes
ticklystuff · 2 years ago
Note
Must you make you choose a spot on Alhaitham? Clearly it has to be everywhere 👀
(Sides)
request a ficlet!
this ended up being a lot longer than it should have been and there's not much tickling lol but i decided to use this for alhaitham's bday! it's still the tenth here but close enough hehe
---
"Say cheese!"
"Cheese!"
Snap.
"Ugh, Alhaitham, would it kill you to smile?" Kaveh groaned as the sound of the kamera went off, effectively capturing the scene in front of them. Once the image was produced, Kaveh held the picture in his hand and sighed once more. There Alhaitham was, sitting in the chair emotionless as Dehya oriented her fingers over his head to give Alhaitham bunny ears, while wearing her biggest grin that effectively balanced out Alhaitham's blank stare. "Well, at least Dehya is having fun."
"Because I did not ask for a birthday celebration."
"For someone so smart, you don't seem to understand the point of a surprise party."
"For someone so-"
"Okay, okay," Nilou quickly butt in, placing her hand on Kaveh's shoulder, "let's not argue now. We're here to celebrate Alhaitham's special-"
"It was supposed to be a very normal day, actually," Alhaitham cut in pointedly.
"Okay, Alhaitham's normal day," she finished just as calmly as she started. "Let's just all try to have a fun time, alright? No fighting."
"Can someone else just go get their picture taken with him?" Tighnari sighed, kamera in hand. "We're never going to have dinner at this rate."
"Ah, right, one moment," Nilou said, heading over to the side and rummaging through her bag. Kaveh watched as she lifted what looked to be a handwoven flower crown, smiling as she walked over to Alhaitham. "The kids at the theater and I wanted to make something nice for the birthday boy," Nilou said happily, placing the crown atop Alhaitham's head. Though he didn't protest, Kaveh just barely caught the slight twitch of his eye.
A sudden nudge to his side prompted Kaveh to turn around, noticing Dehya standing right beside him. "Just wanted to let you know that I'm having a great time, even if he might not be," Dehya said reassuringly to Kaveh, as if she read his mind. "It's nice seeing everyone again."
His lips curled into a small smile, feeling himself beam a little bit. "Thanks, I'm glad someone here is enjoying themselves. Archons forbid I do something nice for his birthday."
"He doesn't seem like the type to enjoy social gatherings, though."
"Oh, yeah, I know that, but I thought that part might have changed since he has actual friends now," Kaveh sighed, watching as Nilou draped her arms over Alhaitham's shoulders and pinched his cheeks with her fingers to force a grin for the picture, though, his eyes spoke a different story. "As annoying as it is, I guess I only have myself to blame. I thought he'd at least smile for his friends, though."
"We could try tickling him to get a smile out of him for a picture," Dehya suggested with a laugh, "but I already had my picture with him, so it'd be up to you."
"Yeah, if I want my fingers broken," Kaveh scoffed.
"Hey, broken fingers heal over time, but it seems like Alhaitham's smile might be a once in a lifetime opportunity."
"Um, I'm alright."
"Okay, say cheese," Tighnari spoke once Nilou and Alhaitham were ready.
"Cheese!" Nilou's voice rang throughout the room. Once the picture snapped, she gave Alhaitham a quick pat on the head, before striding over to Kaveh. "I think you might be the last one, Kaveh."
"I don't think Kaveh and I need a pic-"
"No, we are getting a picture together, Alhaitham," Kaveh said exasperatedly, walking towards the birthday boy before he could leave his chair. "Just smile and this will be over with quick. C'mon, Tighnari."
"Alright, say cheese."
"Cheese."
Snap.
Once the photo was printed, Dehya took it in her hands and looked for a moment, before looking up at Kaveh.
"Well, do we look good?" Kaveh asked her, still standing beside Alhaitham.
"I mean, you look fine," Dehya said, looking back at the picture, "but Alhaitham isn't smiling again."
Kaveh let out a frustrated sigh, his patience about to snap. "Okay, Tighnari, another photo please. And Alhaitham, please, please, smile for the camera, just once. At least pretend like you're having a good time."
Alhaitham simply looked up at the blond, crossing his arms and cocking an eyebrow in response, before looking back straight in front of him with the same usual blank expression. Kaveh nearly slapped the backside of his head in frustration, only to see Dehya standing in the corner of the room, seemingly attempting to grab his attention. Once he spotted her, she pointed to her own sides with her fingers, mouthing words to Kaveh. It took him a moment to realize she was silently saying 'tickle him'.
Well, at this point, it was worth a shot.
"Okay, ready?" Tighnari asked the two of them.
"Ready," Kaveh affirmed.
"Say cheese."
"Cheese!" 
"A-Ah! Hehehey!"
Before the sound of the camera went off, Kaveh managed to quickly reach down and skitter his fingers along Alhaitham's side, prompting the scribe to try and squirm away in his chair. The others had stopped what they were doing to watch the sudden spectacle, the only sound of Alhaitham's laughter filling the room.
"Quick, Tighnari, he's smiling! Take the picture!" Kaveh hurriedly said when he didn't hear the usual snap of the kamera. He had to reach down to use his other hand to tickle the other side in an attempt at keeping Alhaitham from wiggling out of the chair.
"Kahaveheheh! Stahahap!" 
"O-Okay," Tighnari said, clearly flustered by the sudden commotion, but quickly looked back up at Kaveh. "Oh crud, I'm out of film!"
"Oh, for heaven's sake!"
"Um, Cyno, could you grab me more film from my bag?" Tighnari nearly tripped over his words as he rushed to ask the other.
"Where's your bag?"
"It should be here somewhere!"
"That doesn't help me."
"I think I saw it in the kitchen!" Nilou quickly dodged around the other two, before running off down the hall with Dehya in tow to help.
"K-Kaveh!I'm gonAHAhaha kill youhuHUHU!"
"Guys, hurry, please!" Kaveh cried out with urgency, as he wasn't sure how much longer he could keep Alhaitham confined to the chair and smiling for the photo. He had gone from a scribbling method to pinching away at each side, hoping that the stronger reaction would keep Alhaitham at bay.
"We found it!" Kaveh suddenly heard Dehya's voice from down the hall, seeing the two women run back to the main room, with the new film in Dehya's hand. The two hurriedly gathered around Tighnari, with Cyno joining soon after. It didn't take long for Tighnari to load the film amongst the commotion and he quickly turned to Kaveh and Alhaitham once finished.
"Okay, say cheese!"
"Just take the picture!" Kaveh said with a forced grin
"StahAHAHAhahap!"
Snap.
Once the snap was heard throughout the air, Kaveh quickly removed his hands from Alhaitham's body and everyone collectively sighed with relief. He walked over to the others as the photo printed, exhausted from the short bout of chaos.
"Aw, you guys look so cute!" Nilou said, handing the picture over to Kaveh once she was done examining it.
Kaveh couldn't help but smirk as his eyes glanced over the photo. Alhaitham was hunched over, eyes screwed shut with a big grin from all the tickling. He actually had a photogenic smile and could be mistaken for something natural, had Kaveh not been there to tickle him into it. In truth, Alhaitham looked better than Kaveh in the photo, both with forced smiles, but the pain of trying to keep Alhaitham in place did not reflect well on Kaveh's face. "This was not worth the effort," Kaveh huffed, placing the photo beside all the others, contrasting Alhaitham's blank stares from the previous pictures.
"Wait, we still need one more photo, though," Nilou said and Alhaitham audibly groaned from his chair. "A group one!"
"Absolutely not," Alhaitham responded with a shake of his head. "No more photos."
"Well, you don't need to smile, but it'd be nice, I think," Nilou told the others and Kaveh nodded in agreement.
"How are we supposed to take a group photo, though?" Tighnari said, looking at his kamera. "Unless by 'group photo' you mean everyone but me."
Nilou shook her head and laughed. "No, of course not! We can gather around you and you can point the camera at yourself. I think that's how the traveler did it with his kamera when they were taking pictures around Sumeru with Paimon."
"Ah, I see, I see," Tighnari nodded. "Well, everyone get close!"
Dehya, Nilou, and Cyno gathered around Tighnari and Kaveh followed as well, when he noticed Alhaitham still sitting in his chair, arms stubbornly crossed. "Alhaitham," he beckoned impatiently with his hand and Alhaitham sighed, rolling his eyes, before reluctantly getting up and walking to the group.
"Alright, everyone ready?" Tighnari said as he held up the kamera facing the group. "Say chee- wait, no. Say 'happy birthday, Alhaitham!'"
Kaveh quickly wrapped his arm around Alhaitham and landed a quick poke to his side, forcing the other to smile just in time for the photo as he jolted in response.
"Happy birthday, Alhaitham!"
Snap.
56 notes · View notes
mrssimply · 2 years ago
Text
22th: Knots
Hello Dear, you've been so very patient, but then again, you chose the 22th for your gift so I think you just like to torture yourself. I think you'll find you're not the only one, Johnny and Kerry are right there with you ;).
As always, you've been a real MVP during this whole month, keeping up with the rhythm, leaving kudos and commenting each time. It's always a pleasure to read your reactions, so I hope this one pleases you. I made it very frustrating to everyone involved, reader included because I'm a demon
This one is for @strandhai, who prompted: "A little bit of shibari. Johnny has to be a good boy all tied up and has to watch V and Kerry before he is allowed to cum"
The prompt should be enough to clue you about the rating ^^
You can find the prompt list here.
Every fic will be posted on my AO3 Account here.
V had to go on a trip to help the Aldecaldos. He said he would be gone for five days, and told his inputs they couldn't get themselves or each other off during his absence. He said it with a tender smile, kissing Kerry sweetly as the man kneeled up on the bed. He kept straining needily for more kisses every time V leaned away. Once he was finished with Kerry, V turned to Johnny and gripped his hair to wrench his head back, looking him straight in the eyes. 
“That clear?” he whispered against his lips, knowing full well which of the two was the least well behaved. 
“Crystal,” Johnny replied, trying to look as innocent as he could.
So V left them… and came back one day earlier, only to find Johnny balls deep into Kerry. 
-
V waits for a night and a day to Johnny stew in the anticipation of his punishment. Kerry doesn't even try to take his share of the blame, and only shrugs when Johnny argues he was a tease on purpose. V believes that, but the rule was clear, and Johnny broke the rule, like he always does.
So tonight, V makes them both kneel naked on the bed, Kerry against the headboard, and Johnny by the foot of the bed. He watches them look at each other with matching desire in their gazes. Johnny growls softly and widens his knees, already hardening just because of the situation. Kerry looks more composed, fakes patience better than Johnny these days, after a lifetime of interviews. The singer looks at V behind Johnny, who is slowly walking around the bed, wrapping a long silky rope between his hands. Following his gaze, Johnny turns to him too, and curses when he sees what V pulled out of their kinky closet.
“Face forward, Johnny, arms behind your back,” V indicates, coming closer.
Tension rises inside Johnny, his whole self rebelling against the order, but he still does it slowly, showing his reluctance.
“Good boy,” V comments cheerfully, and gets glared at for his troubles. He just raises an eyebrow as the rocker, amused by his attitude. 
Then V wraps his arms around Johnny’s chest loosely and kisses his nape before softly biting the junction of his neck and shoulder.
“Kerry baby, why don’t you give us a show while I work?”
Said man exhales softly, half lidded eyes lazily roaming over Johnny’s naked form before he moves to the side of the bed and retrieves the lube and his favorite toy. It's a simple short but thick dildo that matches his eyes in color.
Johnny watches him hungrily, barely feels it when V releases one end of the rope so that it flows over his skin, ticking over his abs and pooling between his legs in a sensual caress. His cock twitches and his hips jerk forward but other than that, he doesn’t move. He knows his place in these games by now.
As V wraps the rope between his pectorals, forming a knot right under his collar bone, Johnny watches Kerry settle back against the pillows and spread his legs obscenely. He cups his balls, squeezes them just a bit before moving up to his cock. He teases himself with light fingers, curls them around the head to give himself a few strokes before he stops again. With a soft sound, he trails his hands up over his hard stomach to his nipples and plays with them nearly absently, gaze still watching what V is doing. He moans softly when he pinches them, and his cock twitches in answer to the stimulation.
V divides the rope so that two strands go on each side, underlying Johnny's pectorals like Kerry’s chrome does on his own chest. V caresses Johnny’s stomach slowly, enjoying the feeling of his scarred sensitive skin under his palms before he plunges between his legs, stroking the inside of his thighs tenderly.
“So, you couldn’t wait five days? You’re so desperate you have to get off even when I tell you not to?” V asks conversationally.
Johnny doesn’t reply, only turns his head to seek a kiss. Feeling benevolent, V grants him that, still grabbing his hair in warning: he’s pushing his luck. As he kisses him, V grabs his cock and give it half a dozen deep strokes that have Johnny growling and bucking forward. V bites his bottom lips and grabs the rocker’s balls tightly to make him still.
“Fucking slut,” V whispers against his lips, “you’re greedy.”
Johnny smirks, an expression that disappears the next second when V pulls sharply on his hair again, making him wince.
“Being horny makes you dumb, Johnny.”
And with that, V goes back to his ropes, tightening the strands until they bite into the rocker’s skin. Johnny groans softly, eyes fluttering for a second as he luxuriates in the sensation. Kerry’s soft moan makes him focus again, eyes jumping to him. The singer now has a finger in his ass while he teases his rim with his other hand, hips slithering back and forth, fucking himself sweetly.
Johnny hisses as his cock gives another pathetic twitch. He exhales long and deep and looks up at the ceiling for distraction, but it's in vain. He knows it's only the beginning of his torture, but damn, it’s already nearly too much, like every time V does this to him.
Kerry continues to play with himself; he goes slow, savors the sensations with closed eyes and a beatific expression. He progressively adds more lube to reach deeper, and pour some in his other hand before wrapping it around his cock. He sighs, enjoying how nicely wet the inside of his fist is, not really jerking off yet but teasing himself and by extension, Johnny. He gives V a show like he was asked to do. 
Over Johnny’s chest, the black silk rope slowly gets tightened as V works. He ties a knot in the middle of Johnny’s back, right above where his arms rest, metal and flesh bound together by will only. V divides the strands again to wrap each limb individually, and then together. As he weaves the rope around Johnny’s wrists, a swift process thanks to experience, the cord heats the man's skin and constrains flesh and muscles. Each time V pulls, Johnny has to bite another moan, has to force himself to stay still when the only thing he wants to do is to melt against V.
Once the back is done, V joins the front and back ropes on each side, just under Johnny’s last rib. 
“Kneel up,” the merc says and Kerry moans because it’s his favorite part. His hips buck up and he strokes himself helplessly a few times before stilling with a laborated breath. Hands shaking a bit, he reaches for the lube and the toy, getting them ready and placing the dildo at the entrance of his ass.
Johnny obeys and V gather all the silk strands to the front, letting them hang between the man’s thighs. He shuffles around his partner to see what he’s doing while still leaving a good view to Kerry. He knots the rope under Johnny’s navel then divides the strands again so that two go on each side of Johnny’s cock. He wraps one around each of Johnny’s legs, leaving that for the time being, before making the two remaining ends cross over Johnny’s cock and under the rocker’s balls. Slowly, he pulls up and it tightens around Johnny’s hard length and heavy balls. 
As he does so, Kerry pushes the dildo inside himself and Johnny curses, strains against the rope because he loves it when it nearly hurts, when it aches, and because he can’t help it when he wishes he could bury himself in place of the toy.
V chuckles behind them and passes the cords under his captive, loops them though the rope around Johnny’s arms and knots them. It makes a sort of thong, and later when V pushes him forwards, it will expose his hole perfectly between two black silk strands. But better yet, every time he’ll move his arms it will pull tighter around his cock.
Johnny is panting now, trembling already, but V ignores him, focusing on finishing the legs. He can still hear the way Kerry is fucking himself: he goes deep and slow, clenches around the dildo on each push, sucking the thing in like he can’t live without it. 
“You wanna suck him, Johnny?” V asks as he wraps the rope over and over around Johnny’s thigh. 
The suggestion makes Johnny buck forward and curse before he nods frantically. He can already feel the saliva gathering at the back of his mouth.
“Hum, that’s too bad, cause I said you couldn't touch him for five days but you disobeyed so… We’re gonna have to start over.”
It takes a moment for Johnny to understand the implications and he gasps and tenses when he does.
“No, fuck, V!”
“Ah, don’t worry, you’ll get off. By my hand only,” the merc explains benevolently as he finishes his last knot.
Johnny can still easily move his legs, but the rope will tighten with each step so he’s gonna have to make them count, or not move at all. They both know what he will do.
Going behind Johnny again, V admires his work, following the rope lines with his index and smiling.
“It really suits you,” he praises and Johnny shivers, turning his head with pleading eyes.
“What, you want a kiss?”
“Yeah,” the other man breathes needily. With a glance at Kerry, who’s wanthomly fucking himself now, V nods and smiles. He leans forward to kiss Johnny, but doesn’t actually do it, teasing him until he groans impatiently. He catches Johnny’s chin and observes him with gleaming eyes.
“Open,” he orders, “show me your tongue.”
Shaking with anticipation and leftover rebellion, Johnny plays with fire and stalls as long as he can. V tuts and tightens his grip until Johnny has no other choice but to gasp. Looming over him, V let’s saliva dribble from his mouth to Johnny’s tongue.
“And don’t forget to say thank you,” the merc comments as Johnny closes his eyes and moans like a bitch. V forces his mouth close anyway and hums happily when he sees the other man swallow obediently.
Johnny opens his eyes to catch V’s raised eyebrow and he grits his teeth.
“Thank you,” he growls between clenched teeth.
“Good boy,” V praises, finally kissing him.
Kerry hasn’t said anything since the beginning, but now he curses with a wrecked voice and arches back, watching them with glassy eyes. V kisses Johnny breathless, biting on his lips, tongue fucking him until he melts, claiming his mouth like he will his ass later. 
Later, after he’s taken Kerry.
“Stop,” he commands and both men tenses and still. It was directed at Kerry, but by now they’re both getting desperate and that makes them obedient.
“I’m gonna fuck Kerry, now,” he announced, thumb brushing Johnny’s bottom kip tenderly, “And you’re gonna watch without moving, clear?”
“Cristal,” Johnny whispers but this time, V really believes he will try to obey. It’s gonna be a sweet battle to watch, it always is.
With a condescending pat on Johnny’s cheek, V turns to his neglected input, who’s breathing hard and fast. His hands are trembling on his thighs as he tries not to reach between his legs for his cock or the toy.
Tutting gently, V pulls out the dildo, reveling in the way Kerry shivers and jerks. He takes his time getting comfortably positioned between the musician’s legs, forcing them apart further, and pulling him half on his lap. He pushes pillows under his waist before he deems the setting ready.
“Comfortable?” He asks Kerry with a warm voice. The man nods, expression a bit vacant already. It’s cute. V leans in to kiss him sweetly, a lot differently than he did with Johnny, all soft teasing touches and tender swipes of tongue.
Then, after brushing Kerry’s sweaty hair back from his forehead, V guides his cock in. He starts thrusting right away, no need to make himself wait with how wet and open Kerry is. He’ll take his time though, won’t stop until he’s made his input come at least twice.
And all the while, Johnny will be watching and holding still.
10 notes · View notes
isabel-bishop · 19 days ago
Text
Isabel clutched the box tighter against her chest as Pride seemed to talk for a lifetime about her choices, what could go wrong, as if she had not thought of them. Sure, her choices may seem reckless but everything is riding on her– the lives of everyone is on her shoulders like there is an unbearable weight that she can't shake, yet she has to persevere. The lives of every single Prince she cares for, the man she loves, her friends and everyone in between will be dead if she doesn't. Yet, why is the only person who's opinion that truly mattered the only one who doesn't appear to have faith in her. No... rooting her on like a Prince should for his Queen. The witch let a silence spread saying nothing until she was sure that he was done speaking, gaze never wavering from his face. The potion didn't completely remove her emotions, no, and there was a deep rage taking root the longer she stood in her Prince's presence. "Twenty, Pride. Twenty Goddess be damned lives that count on me, including my own, and yet... out of every single one of them, you're the only one who has been the least supportive," the woman spat out, placing the box carrying Pride's lifeline gently on a side table before moving to advance closer to her Prince. "Have you noticed that somehow everything that I'm doing is about you in your eyes? I have to be convincing so I don't be the death of you. I'm doing everything that is necessary but you're losing me? You aren't the only one that is going to be hurt if I fail, Pride, but somehow that's the only thing you can see." Isabel gave a wry chuckle, eyes cast to the ceiling as she briefly brushed a hand over her brow. Her gaze landed back on Pride once more, arms lifting in a shrug. "Perhaps we don't know each other very well, actually, but thanks for reminding me once again the dangers. You think I'm not aware of the fact that he broke the goddamn First Daughter and yet I'm supposed to somehow be better than him at every corner. Me, who has no remarkable witch blood in me other than the fact that I'm a fucking great healer, which I have not done a lick of since leaving my coven. I guess it's a good thing I'm hot and sarcastic– I really have that going for me." The last sentence fell from her lips with a bite, somehow managing to push down the rising anger until it was nothing but simmering coals. With a sigh, the witch shook her head. "I don't have time for this. I know I came here on business but I was actually happy, despite what you think, that I had an excuse to come near you since your King is surely watching but this has been less than tasteful."
Tumblr media
"Most likely. Darling, do you even hear yourself?" Pride squeezed his hands into fists at his side, glancing from the woman he knew in the deepest crevices of his heart that he still loved despite her reckless decisions, and landing on the box containing his dagger with an uncomfortable aura that caused the demon's skin to itch. The fate of his destiny rested in the form of his dagger, spending centuries keeping it safely guarded and now forced to trust the First Witch protecting the very weapon she could use to kill him if the desire arose. "You better make absolutely certain that it is convincing, Isabel, or he will make you watch as he shoves the real one through my heart. Don't be the death of me." Pride turned on his heel and walked a few paces away, ripping himself from the witch's orbit. Irritating. She was finding him and his words irritating. Not an uncommon emotion from Bel especially in the early days before they were together, but this decision of hers...left him doubting if Isabel's choices were sound. He turned, willing to face her completely. "I don't think you have thought this through, Bel. While you are spending all of this time trying to save everyone else at the expense of your life, your sanity, offering yourself up to the King...it is costing you everything. I'm losing you." Pride placed his hands on his hips and released a heavy sigh that felt as if it deflated his chest, "I am not nor have I ever doubted you and to think I of all people would means you do not know me as well as you assumed." The demon prince turned again and leaned against the edge of his desk before pushing off of it in exasperation, "I know he got to Gluttony, Bel, I know what our reality entails. Us all dead at his feet while he makes you a puppet obeying his every whim. You won't be a queen, you'll be his trophy. I understand why you think yourself thinking the contrary at his level, but this is what he does. He breaks anyone."
Tumblr media
12 notes · View notes
odin-energy · 2 years ago
Text
5 Things You Must do when in Las Vegas
Tumblr media
Las Vegas is one of the most popular tourist destinations in the world, and for good reason. It's home to some of the most luxurious hotels and casinos in the world, plus it has an exciting nightlife scene and plenty of things to do during the day. Whether you're looking for something classic like gambling or a more adventurous activity like skydiving, Las Vegas will have what you're looking for if you know where to look! But there are also some hidden gems in Las Vegas that people don't always think about when they visit this amazing city. Here are five things every traveler should experience while visiting Las Vegas:
Visit the Grand Canyon.
You must visit the Grand Canyon. It's one of those things you've always wanted to do, but it seems too far away or too expensive, right? Wrong!
If you are visiting Las Vegas and want to see a little bit more of what Nevada has to offer, then getting out into nature is a must. There are many ways to do this without having to go very far outside of Vegas city limits: by helicopter tours; hiking along trails leading up towards viewpoints overlooking Hoover Dam (which is only about 30 minutes away); taking boat rides along the Colorado River that runs through Hoover Dam and into Lake Mead; renting bicycles at Red Rock Canyon National Conservation Area in Summerlin near West Sahara Avenue where there's plenty of space for cycling enthusiasts; riding horses along scenic trails at nearby Spring Mountain Ranch State Park which also offers horseback riding lessons if needed - all within 20 minutes from downtown Las Vegas!
Play golf at the Las Vegas Strip.
Play golf at the Las Vegas Strip.
There are many golf courses in Las Vegas, including TPC Summerlin and Southern Highlands Golf Club. You can even play during the day or at night! Many packages are available for those who want to play with their friends or family members.
Go to a concert at the Caesars Palace.
If you're looking to go out and experience a concert in Las Vegas, then the Caesars Palace is the right place for you. The casino has hosted many famous concerts over the years and continues to do so today. From Elton John to Mariah Carey, this venue has played host to some of the biggest names in music history! Whether you're into rock or pop music; hip hop or country...the Caesars Palace has a concert going on every single night of your stay!
You'll be able to enjoy an amazing atmosphere at this iconic venue with its state-of-the-art sound system as well as its luxurious seating options which include couches on stage level with personal tables & chairs overlooking every performer from all angles. There are also VIP packages available which include private balconies overlooking everything happening below them (including views directly into dressing rooms).
Watch Cirque du Soleil show
If you are in Las Vegas, you must watch a Cirque du Soleil show.
This is something that everyone should experience at least once in their lifetime. The performances are always different, so it won't be boring to go again and again! It's an acrobatics show, visual spectacle, and musical performance all at once! It's like nothing else on Earth--the performers do things that seem impossible from where I sit watching them from my seat in the audience!
The shows are also known for having some of the best sound systems around--so don't worry about whether or not your hearing will be damaged by all of the loud music during these shows (there will still be some).
Experience the Hoover Dam.
One of the best things about visiting Las Vegas is that you can experience all of this amazing city in one place. The Hoover Dam is located on the Colorado River, which makes it a perfect place to visit if you are looking for something fun and exciting to do during your stay in Las Vegas. It's also one of the most impressive man-made structures that exist today!
The dam was built by President Herbert Hoover back in 1931 and still holds up today as one of America's greatest engineering feats ever achieved by humans. There are many tours available at this historic landmark where visitors will learn about its history while exploring some interesting facts about how it was constructed as well as what goes on behind-the-scenes every day at this beautiful location!
Enjoying yourself in Las Vegas
Tumblr media
Las Vegas is a great place to visit. There are many things to do in Las Vegas, like visiting the Grand Canyon or Hoover Dam. You can also visit Caesars Palace, which is a popular casino located on the Strip. The best part of Las Vegas is that you don't have to spend any money while you're here!
Insulation is a topic that comes up frequently in the warm climate of Nevada. Solar radiation, higher temperatures, and low humidity can have adverse effects on your home's structure and comfort, leading to more expensive energy bills and an uncomfortable living environment. It's important to take preventative measures to ensure that your home remains insulated year-round. Here are five things to consider when insulating your Las Vegas home.
Odin Energy is a pioneer in the field of renewable energy. Formed in 2015, Odin Energy NV has quickly grown from a few enterprising students working out of their garages to a company that employs hundreds of people across multiple countries. It was because of this spirit of innovation and entrepreneurship that Odin Energy was awarded one of the three slots on SpaceX’s list of “impossible” ideas.
Odin Energy NV
3322 Sunset Rd suite 115, Las Vegas, NV 89120, United States
(702) 703 3428
0 notes
atoasttotheendoftheworld · 2 years ago
Text
I sometimes feel unsuitable to live.
More specifically, whenever I get a job interview. It's a feeling I can't explain, but I believe many feel it, perhaps all, at least once in a lifetime. However, the trouble comes when it lingers and you find yourself as an adult that no longer has the "excuse" of youth for not being what society requires from you.
A productive citizen.
That translates into a worker. A consumer. Someone that throws money flowing into circulation again, and keeps the capitalistic economy that grips us so tightly in any aspect of our lives going.
Then suddenly to live doesn't seem like a thing you can do anymore.
You breathe, walk, eat and sleep, yet you don't feel part of the process of living. Or rather, you don't feel part of the life process that you have been taught is right and correct.
You don't generate. You don't consume. You don't put money into circulation.
Suddenly, taking a walk in the woods is wasting time since it doesn't profit. Reading. Writing. Painting. Even baking a cake or sewing. All must earn a payback that you can then spend on other goods, other products.
For that is living: consume and consume again.
And if you don't work, whatever you do has no value anymore. For a pastime is such, and can be granted to you, only if it happens after you've contributed to the process of producing and consuming.
For simply living, because you are born, because someone has wanted you to be born, is no longer a valuable reason to exist once you cease to be a child, an adolescent and a student.
Once you become an adult you cannot simply live.
First and foremost, of your everyday and every hour, there must be the imperative of being part of a system. If you're not, you're a failure by default. A burden. A nothingness. A worthless human.
Then, abruptly, life becomes smothering.
As if drowning, you struggle and seek to rise to the surface, like everybody and with everybody. You search for jobs. Yet it always seems you're doing it poorly, coming in late, getting no place and everything looks all the more difficult. Even the simplest of tasks makes you anxious and nervous, for there are those who watch and say they want no mistakes, they won't allow slowdowns. All things must happen quickly, fast.
You must be able to do and do well, everything and immediately. No time to learn. No time to apprehend, not even what is new.
Because wasting time is a crime in this system here.
So anxiety rises, at every job interview you think, "Will I be good at it?" or "Will I be capable of doing it without becoming a nuisance to everyone?" and you don't know why, but you become afraid of it and assume that there isn't a job you're suited for. Although, deep down, you do know that truth is that you don't have to be suited to do some kinds of job. You just have to do it in order to serve.
Because it's the sole way the system has enforced to make us live.
Yet as you get home and resume sending out cvs and emails, you can't think of nothing but how damn unfit for life you feel.
And it's a shame, a real shame, that this feels too much alike a loss of liberty. And it's a damn shame, a cruel one, that in the end to be suited for living you should simply be willing to be glad about it. Existing and that's all it should be.
And yet.
Yet someone, someday, persuaded us that it needs a system to acknowledge your life's validity, and we all just nodded.
0 notes
steddieassheg0es · 2 years ago
Text
I Think He Wants To Be Gentle With Me
Steve had been through this before. Well, not this, the demobats and Vecna, but this Upside Down bullshit.  He’d been through more insanity in the past couple years than most people experience in a lifetime. He’s a pro.
So why is he absolutely NOT handling this well?
Even Eddie, the first timer, has made it through with his easy smiles in tact. He seems surprisingly unfazed by it all. He barely made it out of that place, but he seems so light and joyful. Maybe it’s that the whole town doesn’t think he’s a Satanic murderer anymore, maybe he’s just happy to be alive. Whatever it’s is he seems to be in good spirits. Which is great.
But Steve. Steve can’t sleep. It’s been months since he dragged Eddie’s body back through the rapidly closing gate back to the real world. Since the weird government hospital ran their tests and treated their wounds. And in those months he hasn’t gotten more than a few hours sleep at a time, none of it peaceful.
Eddie may be healing well, but god…he looked dead down there when they first found him and Dustin. Even when they felt a pulse, Steve wasn’t entirely sure if he was dragging him back to be nursed back to health or just because he couldn’t bear the thought of leaving his body in that place.
So now when he closes his eyes, that’s what he sees. Those huge brown eyes dull and lifeless. Sometimes he’s there with him, wrapped up in those vines watching Eddie screaming and begging for help and just can’t get to him. Sometimes he only gets there in time to watch his last breath. But he was always, always too late.
He tried to just avoid sleeping for a while. But Steve was pretty sure you could die from lack of sleep eventually. Or at least go crazy. And his friends were concerned, they could clearly see his exhaustion. The last thing he wanted was to burden them with unnecessary concern after everything they’d gone through. Especially the kids. So eventually he caved.
That night was the worst. That night he wasn’t in control of his own body. He wasn’t just unable to save Eddie, he was the one who killed him. Plunging a knife into him over and over. He woke up and felt like he couldn’t breathe. He could still feel the blood on his shaking hands.
So that is how Steve Harrington ended up in Eddie Munson’s doorstep at 2AM on a Tuesday.
Eddie opened his door clearly very unimpressed to be woken at such an hour. His hair was even more wild than usual, his big doe eyes blinking away sleep.
“Who the fuck—“ Eddie took one look at him and softened. “Harrington?”
And just like that, Steve could breathe again.
Eddie was surprised when it was all said and done that he seemed to have been adopted into this little found family. He was grateful for everything they’d done, everything they’d risked for him. He just figured once the danger was gone, they would be too.
Well, not the Hellfire kids, though they’re even closer now. Robin he wasn’t too shocked by either, kindred queers as they were (though neither had actually come out to the other, Eddie had figured her out in middle school and he’s fairly certain she did the same). Nancy Wheeler was a surprise. Even the Cali group welcomed him with no hesitation. Then there was Steve.
Steve…ask him a year ago and he’d laugh and say the guy’s a douche. But Dustin had been singing his praises all year long. He wasn’t sure then how much he believed it all but the kid had good instincts so there had to be some truth in it.
Then he met him, really met him and saw just how fucking sweet the guy could be. The way he took care of everyone. He may grumble about ‘always being the babysitter’, but he was fiercely protective of those kids. And anyone in need, it seemed.
He didn’t think the others knew it, but Steve had dropped by during his isolation quite a bit on his own. Not with supplies or updates. Just…to be there. When Eddie finally got the courage to ask why, he’d let out a hollow little laugh.
“No one should be alone all the time, man.”
Eddie couldn’t be sure, but he got the feeling Steve knew what that was like.
Shit. Eddie wasn’t dumb, he had eyes. He’d always known how fucking gorgeous the other man was. Now to have that paired with the charming, surprisingly dorky guy he’d gotten to know…Eddie’s heart never stood a chance.
Then everything was done and Eddie was prepared to get that heart a little broken. He did not for a second think Steve would keep on hanging around him once he wasn’t a damsel in distress. Sure, he now knew Steve was a genuinely good person. But that’s all he figured it was. Kindness to the freak in need.
Yet here he was.
He’d helped Eddie move in to his nice new house. Once the government had cleared his name they’d set him up with what he assumed was a “sorry you got blamed for a murder committed by our mistake of a monster, also keep your mouth shut about said monster” gift. It wasn’t anything fancy, but it was a hell of a lot better than going back to the trailer where he watched Chrissy…
Steve even came to the first Hellfire Club meeting post not-pocalypse. He’d spent most of it looking adorably confused, but he’d stayed. He’d even given Eddie these looks that could only be described as fondly amused at his most theatrical moments.
Not a day went by in the weeks after it all that he didn’t see Steve. So Eddie watched the progression of exhaustion on his face. He couldn’t help the growing knot of concern in his stomach. He wanted to say something, do something, but he wasn’t sure if he was allowed.
The others saw it too. He’d overheard what sounded like the planning of an intervention. But it turns out to be unnecessary, and he doesn’t even have to do anything. There’s a knock on his door at 2 in the goddamned morning scaring him awake. He swings the door open, ready to inflict pain on whoever dared to disturb his slumber.
“Who the fuck—“ Steve? God he looks like a wreck, devastated and so tired. Eddie’s anger vanished and was instantly replaced by worry. “Harrington?”
“I-I’m sorry. I shouldn’t have…god it’s so late, I’m an asshole, go back to—“
“Steve” he interrupts the rambling gently, “What’s wrong?”
“It’s stupid, I don’t…”
“Whatever it is, if it’s got you this upset it’s not stupid. Come inside. Please.”
Steve takes a shuddering breath then nods. “Yeah…yeah ok.”
Eddie opens the door wider and lets Steve pass. He hesitates before putting a hand on his back to guide him over to the couch. Eddie grabs a blanket off the back and wraps it around Steve’s shoulders without thinking. Then carefully sits beside him.
“Now…what’s wrong?”
“I know it’s crazy but I just…I needed to see you. To see that you’re ok.”
That…wasn’t what Eddie was expecting to hear. He’s not quite sure what to do with it. “Why wouldn’t I be ok?”
Steve curls further in on himself and closes his eyes like he’s bracing himself.
“I’ve been having nightmares. Since everything. And tonight I…you were…” tears leak from beneath those tightly closed eyes, “It was me who killed you. Vecna, the Mind Flayer, whatever, made me kill you. There was so much blood and I watched you die and it was all my fault I couldn’t stop it I couldn’t—“
“Steve, Steve! Breathe.” Eddie places a gentle hand on Steve’s chest and makes a show of his own deep breathing. “That’s it, inhale…exhale…you’re safe. I’m fine, I’m right here with you. Everything’s ok. Shhh.”
Steve was still shaking, but at least he wasn’t hyperventilating anymore. God, he looked so…small. Small and fragile, like the slightest breeze and he’d just break to pieces.
“I’m sorry, I’m sorry. I just don’t want to be alone right now. You can go back to bed, I’ll be fine, just…can I stay on the couch?”
Eddie remembers that hollow laugh. ‘No one should be alone all the time’ he’d said. Just how often was Steve left by himself in that big house of his?
“Come on sweetheart, look at me.” The endearment slips out but he’s pretty sure Steve was too out of it to have really noticed. His eyes finally opened and met Eddie’s. “Here’s what we’re gonna do. We are both going back to bed, I have plenty of space to share.” There was a wild, panicked look in those eyes now. “You’re exhausted Steve, you have to sleep. You can’t keep going like this. But I’ll be right there. You have another nightmare and I’ll be right there with you. I can remind you that I’m-that we’re all ok. We made it out of there. It’s over.”
With that he stands and tugs on the end of the other man’s sleeve. “Come on, up.”
At this point there was nothing left in him. He couldn’t fight as Eddie pulled him by his shirt down the hall towards the bedroom. Or as he was nudged towards the bed, then gently pushed down on it.
“I can sleep on the floor, it’s fine.”
Eddie shot him a glare. “Not happening Harrington. I have a king size bed I’m not making you sleep on the damn floor. You need actual rest.”
Eddie knelt down on the floor in front of him and his heart stuttered, still beating rapidly but no longer from fear. But then Steve’s shoes were pulled off and his legs were nudged up onto the bed. He scooted over as far as his body would let him as Eddie joined him and pulled the blankets up to cover them both.
“Alright now princess, close those pretty eyes of yours. It’s time for good little boys to sleep.”
“Mm what about you?” he mumbled drowsily.
“Aww are you saying I’m not a good boy? I’m wounded!” Eddie chuckled.
His tongue felt heavy in his mouth as he tried to form a response.
“Shhh, you can snark at me all you want later. Sleep.”
And somehow…he did.
Eddie wakes for the second time much later in the day, his brain fuzzy. He almost thinks last night was a dream but…There’s an unexpected pressure on top of him.
He looks down to see that in the night Steve had shifted, curled up around him with one leg hitched over his and an arm thrown over him. Steve’s head was resting just above his heart, which felt like it was going to beat right out of his chest.
Shit. Shit. His eyes shot back to the ceiling above. What had he been thinking, forcing Steve into his bed? With him in it? He was so utterly screwed.
But looking back down at the man resting peacefully, he couldn’t regret it. If by some miracle he made Steve feel safe enough to actually sleep…He could do this. He could let the extremely straight man he’d been pathetic enough to fall so madly in love with platonically share his bed. His stupid heart could take the abuse. He’d take an awful lot to bring Steve peace.
So he settled in as much as he could. No way was he going to get up and risk waking his sleeping beauty. Carefully, he lifted the arm under Steve enough to card his hand through that oh-so-famous head of hair. Soft.
It was another 30 minutes or so before the other man began to stir. Eddie’s hand froze as the head beneath it titled back. Pretty hazel eyes blinked up at him blearily.
“Wha-?”
“Hey there, welcome back to the waking world. How do you feel?” His voice was barely a whisper, like if he spoke too loud the safe bubble they were in would shatter.
“Eddie?” Steve’s brow furrowed with his usual look of adorable confusion. “What…huh?”
He couldn’t help the laugh that tumbled out of him. Fuck, this man was cute. And very clearly not a morning person. Or late afternoon person, as it was. “Take your time princess.”
A pretty pink blush made it’s way across Steve’s cheeks. “Princess?” He looks down,  then seems to suddenly snap into awareness of their positions because he rolls himself off of Eddie frantically. “Shit, I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to…”
Eddie shrugs easily like it didn’t make his foolish heart ache to lose Steve’s touch. “It’s not a big deal. You didn’t answer my question, though. How’re you feeling?”
Huh. He feels…well, not great exactly, but definitely better. He actually slept. Not enough to quite make up for all the sleep he’s lost, but still. No more nightmares plagued him last night.
“Wow. I can’t believe I really slept. Was starting to think I’d never get a full night again.” He looks up at Eddie with something like awe. “Thank you.”
“Eh it wasn’t like it was a hardship or anything. I’ve had worse bed partners.” Eddie shoots him a cheeky grin and he can feel his face heat up even more.
“Right…well, really, thank you. And I’m sorry for showing up like that. I’ll get out of your hair now.”
“Steve.” Eddie’s face is suddenly deadly serious. “Don’t do that. I know you’re the hero and the worlds best babysitter and all that, but you’re allowed to have needs too. You have absolutely nothing to apologize for.” Seemingly satisfied with his little speech, he once again lights up with a dimpled smile. “Also you can’t just run out of here without breakfast, man. They say it’s the most important meal of the day.”
Steve sees the pleading in those big doe eyes. Damn, Eddie must get everything he wants when he uses those things against people. Steve feels helpless to deny him, anyway.
“Yeah…yeah, ok. But I’m cooking.”
“Duh, Harrington. We both know I’m more likely to burn the place down than produce anything remotely edible.”
For all his joking, Eddie has a fully stocked kitchen. Steve makes himself at home in it while Eddie slides into a stool across the counter, resting his chin in his hand and observing. He grabs everything he’ll need and gets to work. Bacon, eggs, and French toast.
“Well damn, Steve, if I knew having you in my bed meant waking up to a full spread I’d have invited you over a long time ago.”
Eddie says these things so casually, like they don’t make Steve’s heart race and his face burn.
“Yeah…I’ve gotten used to fending for myself in the kitchen and it turns out I enjoy it. I don’t usually have an excuse to make anything special, seems like a waste for just me, so I take advantage when I do.”
He glances over and catches an emotion on Eddie’s face he can’t name before it quickly morphs back into a cheeky smirk.
“Aw Stevie, you’re worth spoiling all on your own.”
Eddie has to bite his tongue to stop from asking about Steve’s parents, how often he’s left to fend for himself...if he’s lonely.
He wants to know everything there is to know about the man across from him. He wants to find every pain and soothe it all away. He wants to find every joy and surround him with it.
But he also wants to keep this morning as light as he can after last night. He doesn’t think Steve is ready to dig in to his other baggage right now. And god does he just want this man to smile.
So he jokes and, like an idiot, he flirts. Delights in every blush he can make rise to the surface. Even more in every smile or laugh he manages to evoke. He’s not stupid enough to think everything is all better, but Steve looks more relaxed than he has since before this shit all started and he’ll take it.
Once they’ve finished eating, Eddie looks over at him and ponders how to stretch this little hang out as long as he can. Riding the high of Steve’s laughter, basking in his presence. He’s not ready to let him go.
“What? What’s that look?”
“Hmm so worried all the time. Don’t worry Steve, I won’t bite…unless you ask nicely.” He winks salaciously.
“I-I’m not worried. You’re not as scary as people think you are Munson.”
“Ohhh that sounds like a challenge. Think you’re tough there big boy?”
“No, I didn’t…never mind.” Steve looks off to the side, embarrassed.
“Hey man I’m only teasing you.” Eddie frowns, knowing he’s stuck his foot right in his mouth once again without even knowing how. He’s not sure what he said wrong, but he knows he did something to ruin the moment.
“No, I know. It’s fine. Anyways, you got any plans today?”
Steve isn’t ready to leave. He’s never ready to leave when Eddie’s around. But he doesn’t want to overstay his welcome.
“Not really. You?”
“I’m off today, but Rob’s working. The kids are all busy doing…honestly, I’m not sure but I don’t think I want to know. So no, I don’t have anything going on today.”
“Mmm, shame. I guess you’ll have to be stuck with me then.” Eddie’s smirking but there’s an almost…hopeful look in his eyes. Maybe he’s still welcome after all.
He had hoped for an opening to insinuate himself into Eddie’s day, but this is a flat out invitation.
“Oh yeah? I guess I can deal with that.”
They end up just lazing around Eddie’s place. He figures one night of rest isn’t really enough after everything so Steve probably isn’t up for too much. Eddie uses the opportunity to force some nerd media on him.
“Really? We’re gonna watch a cartoon about weird magic shit?”
“Hey if you’re gonna be hanging around Hellfire, you’ve gotta up your nerd knowledge man. Be happy I’m not making you read the books even though they’re clearly the superior way to get the story.”
He glances over and sees a pleased little smile on Steve’s face.
“I’m invited to your game nights?”
Eddie furrows his brow, confused by Steve’s surprise. “You’ve already been man, of course you are.”
“Well, yeah, I mean I was on babysitting duty so I drove the kids over and kind of just didn’t leave. S’not the same as being invited.”
“Steve.  Of course you’re invited.” You’re always invited anywhere I am, he doesn’t say.
Steve’s face is alight with a shy, happy glow. “Oh. Ok.”
Did he really not know? Eddie sometimes felt like he had a neon sign above his head that said “stupidly in love with Steve Harrington” and permanent hearts in his eyes, but even with his straight guy obliviousness he still assumed Steve would know he was wanted around. Everyone wants him around. Like, always. Anyone who meets him is drawn into his orbit.
“Yes. Anyway, The Hobbit is required viewing for any and all party members. Including observers.”
“Ok , ok, we’ll watch your nerd movie. I can’t promise I’ll understand any of it though.”
“Don’t worry your pretty little head, Stevie, that’s what I’m here for.”
Steve really doesn’t follow it, but he does enjoy listening to Eddie talk, trying to explain things and get him to pay extra attention to the good parts. Actually he probably follows it a lot less because he’s enjoying listening to Eddie talk.
Eddie’s just so passionate. Even when Steve has no clue what he’s talking about, just feeling the joy radiating out of him when he talks about things he loves is intoxicating.
It’s dangerous, really, because Steve would do anything he asked just to be a part of that joy in some small way.
“So anyway, we’ll watch The Lord of The Rings some time even though it’s kind of a mess. But now it’s your turn. What would you like to watch?”
“Hm? Oh. Uh…I don’t know, man. I mean Rob’s doing her best to get me educated since we work at Family Video but I guess I don’t watch a lot of movies. I’m fine with whatever.”
Eddie turns those Bambi eyes on him at full power. “Aww come on, I want to know what you’d pick. I mean we’re only picking from my collection so you know I’ll like it anyway. No judgement. Just take a look and find something that sparks your interest.”
He’s got to know what he’s doing. But intentional or not, Steve relents to it. He sits on the ground in front of the tv and searches through the tapes. He considers a few horror options, debating whether he could get away with clinging to Eddie in fright before decided they may hit too close to home for him these days.
Finally he settles on The NeverEnding Story. Partially because it reminds him of ‘Dusty-buns’ singing and makes him smile, but also because he thinks the art on the cover is pretty.
Eddie looks to see what he finally settled on. “Ah, good choice.”
They go back and forth picking movies until Eddie finally looks around and realizes it’s dark out. Has been for a while…
“Shit, it’s getting late.”
Steve’s face falls. He’s quick to cover it but Eddie sees it all the same. “Oh, yeah. Sorry for hogging your couch all day, man. This was nice. I should…I should probably get home.”
Fucking hell, what is it going to take for Steve to realize Eddie’s not kicking him out? Will never kick him out. “What? No. I mean…of course you’re not a hostage you can go if you want, I just meant that we should probably eat something.”
“Oh.” He ducks his head like he’s trying to hide his shy smile. “Yeah. Sure. What do you want?”
“I was joking earlier you know, I am capable of making food.”
“I’m sure you’re a culinary genius. But I wasn’t joking earlier when I said I enjoy cooking. So shut up and tell me what you want.”
Eddie raises an eyebrow “Can’t very well do both of those at the same time, can I? I’m not picky, so go wild. Me kitchen es su kitchen.”
The smile he gets in reply is enough to melt the coldest heart, he’s sure. He’d eat steaming garbage to see that smile.
Eddie watches Steve prep his chosen ingredients and feels his heart going mad in his chest. It’s just so domestic. He has to grip the counter he’s leaning back on to stop himself from sliding right in behind Steve and wrapping his arms around his waist. Pressing a biting kiss to his neck. Letting his hands wander…
“You good?”
He blinks away the little fantasy playing in his head and manages a shaky smile. “Yeah, all good. What’d you decide on?”
“Nothing fancy. Just a lemon pasta with roasted asparagus…if you don’t cook why do you have all of this anyway?”
“To lure pretty boys who cook into my kitchen” he grins at Steve’s blush. “I guess those suits had a lot of pity, they stocked this place full of shit. I mean I wouldn’t have picked out a king size bed just for little ol’ me, but hey I wasn’t gonna say no. And apparently that also included food. Like asparagus, another thing I wouldn’t have picked for myself.” 
“It won’t kill you to eat a vegetable.”
“Mmm, yes Princess. Whatever you say.”
Steve puts the pan in the oven and turns to face him. “What’s with that?”
“Hm?”
“Princess? You keep calling me Princess.” He looks torn between upset and…something else Eddie can’t quite decipher. Shit.
“I’m sorry. It’s not…I don’t mean anything by it. I’ll stop.”
“I didn’t say you had to stop. I’m asking why?”
Well that’s…interesting. “I uh…I don’t know. It just…it suits you, somehow. If you prefer King Steve…”
“King Steve was a douchebag.” His nose crinkles in apparent distaste for his past self. “I don’t…I don’t mind Princess.” He’s pink to the tips of his ears and down his chest. Eddie’s tempted to pull at the collar of his shirt and see how far down that color goes. “As long as it’s not a…you know, derogatory thing.”
A gay thing, Eddie’s pretty sure he means. Because he’s not gay. Fuck.
Steve feels like his whole body is on fire. A gay thing, he almost said. As long as you’re not mocking me for being…
“I’m not the expert but I’m pretty sure you’re supposed to stir pasta.”
“Shit!” He turns and gives it a stir, relieved to see he didn’t ruin it.
“Anyway, you don’t know, I may very well choke on that asparagus. A vegetable could kill me.” Something in Eddie’s smile is a little forced. He’s not sure why. Not sure where he messed things up.
They finally sit down to eat and miraculously Eddie survives. Enjoys it even, judging by the noises he makes.
When they’re finished and the dishes are all done, he knows he needs to leave. As gracious of a host as Eddie has been there no way he wants round two of Steve smothering him in his sleep.
At least he got some rest finally. Now he can keep going for a while longer, hopefully not force himself onto Eddie again in a week.
Eddie sees Steve grab his keys and his heart sinks. It was too much to hope that he could just…have this. Platonic snuggle buddies? Probably for the best, laying next to the source of his unrequited love every night would probably slowly kill him.
“Heading out?”
“Yeah I probably should. I could use a shower and some clean clothes, brush my teeth…”
Eddie hesitates, then decides <em>fuck it</em>. “Next time you should bring stuff. I mean I have toothpaste and stuff, but you know, clothes.”
“Next time?”
“Steve. Of course you’re invited.”
He thrills at the pleased little smile he gets. “Right. Well…next time then.” Steve says with a nod goodbye before stepping out of the door.
Eddie lays in bed thinking of Steve all alone in that big house. It must feel lonelier for all the space there is to be empty. He wishes he’d been braver, told Steve to go and grab his things and come right back. He has a spare room. He wouldn’t force the platonic cuddles. But maybe they could still fill each other’s empty spaces. At least some of them.
He’s on the edge of falling asleep when he hears a car pull into his driveway.
It seems that now that his brain has found the best tool to torture him with, it’s going to stick with it. He wakes screaming and trying to wipe the nonexistent blood off his hands.
He can’t do this. He can’t go back. But he can’t stay here.
So he gets in his car and drives aimlessly for a while. Luckily it’s late enough that he doesn’t see anyone else on the road, because he’s kind of zoned out. He’s pretty sure he’s aware enough to be safe, but he’s mostly just staring blankly ahead and trying not to think.
It works too well, because before he knows it he’s pulling up a newly familiar driveway. He turns the off the ignition and just…sits there. He can’t bring himself to go and knock. Maybe he can just sleep in the driveway, this can be close enough.
But then he closes his eyes and he sees the devastating look in Eddie’s staring back at him. The betrayal, the pain, the fear, all done by his hands. The light in those eyes fading.
Suddenly he’s in front of the door and Eddie’s looking out at him. With his wide, clear eyes still full of life. And Steve breathes again.
Eddie ushers him in, not even bothering to stop at the couch this time. “Come on, sweetheart, you’re ok. I’m here. Alright, go on. Into bed.” Steve does as he’s told, falling back into the pillows before throwing his hands over his eyes and sobbing. Eddie’s right there with him, curled up next to him and stroking his side like he’s a spooked horse.
“Shhhh. Oh baby, don’t cry. It’s ok. Everyone’s safe. You’re safe here.”
But that only makes Steve sob harder. “I-I’m sorry…I’m sorry I’m s-so pathetic I can’t go one night sleeping on my o-own.”
Eddie shifts to hover over him, gently tips his chin up until Steve’s hands fall away and those hazel eyes meet his own.
“Don’t you dare feel ashamed to need help. What we did? What we went through? That’s fucking traumatic. And you…God you take such good care of everyone else.” Steve’s eyes dip down and the fingers Eddie has on his chin grip harder and force his eyes back up. “For once let someone one take care of you. Let me take care of you. I want to take care of you. Please.”
“I can’t-I don’t….I’m no good, Eddie. I’m nothing.” Steve let out a broken little laugh. “I’m bullshit. And you’ll figure that out soon. You’ll want to leave like everyone does, only you won’t because you’re too good. And I’ll be too selfish to let you go.”
Eddie’s heart shatters. He wants to tell Steve he is everything, but he doesn’t need to deal with Eddie’s feelings right now. So he pulls Steve up to sit in his lap, wraps himself around him, and tries to surround him with as much love as he can.
“Oh sweetheart. That’s just not true. First of all, I’m never going anywhere and I’ll never want to. You’re stuck with me. Second, you are so, so good Stevie. I can’t even…there aren’t enough words. How could you possibly think you’re not?”
“Everyone knows it. King Steve.” He spits derisively. “What a joke. A hollow boy with a hollow crown.”
“Steve…that’s not who you are anymore. I’m not sure that it ever was, but it certainly isn’t now. You’re…you’re the world’s best babysitter. You’re a hero. You’re the protector, the caretaker, the heart of this little pieced together family. It kills me that you can’t see that about yourself.”
Steve starts struggling to get out of Eddie’s arms, to get up.
“I’m sorry Eddie. I shouldn’t have come. I shouldn’t be putting all of this on you.”
Eddie tightens his grip, refusing to let go. Scared of what will happen if he does.
“No, please. Stay. You cannot leave right now, I’ll lose my mind worrying about you. I want you to stay. I need you to stay with me.”
He sees Steve begin to cave. Of course he would stay for Eddie, not for himself. Eddie would feel guilty about using that against him if it didn’t mean keeping Steve safe. Keeping him here. He isn’t lying, if Steve walked out right now in his state of self-loathing and fear Eddie would go mad with worry until he saw him again.
“Ok, Eddie, if that’s what you want. I’ll stay.”
“Thank you.”
They sit quietly for a while, and when he looks down at Steve there is a far off look in his eyes as he stares at Eddie’s guitar.
“I could hear it, you know.”
Eddie jumps at the sudden break of silence.
“I could hear it, you know.”
Eddie jumps, unaware that Steve had noticed him awake.
“You playing. We could hear it from the house. When it stopped I think my heart did too. I was so worried about you two. It was really hard to stick to the plan. And then when I got back to you…Fuck, Eddie, I really thought you were dead. Dustin was sobbing and you were so still.”
“I’m sorry.”
Steve finally looks over to him. “For what? You have nothing to be sorry for. I hate what you did, but if you hadn’t you and Dustin would both probably be dead. You saved his life. How can I be mad at that?”
“You told me not to be a hero.”
“Yeah, I did. But I’m not mad. It just really fucked me up. To see you like that. I really thought I was bringing you back for a proper funeral. What I’m trying to say is…I’m sorry, Eddie. I should have never let you use yourself as bait like that. If I’d been better, faster, you never would have gotten hurt.”
“Jesus, Steve…You can’t save everyone all the time. We all knew the risks we were taking. You shouldn’t have had to go down there either, none of us should. But we did, and we’re here now. We both made it out alright. You saved my life, Steve, how can you still feel like you didn’t do enough?”
“It’s my job to-“
“No. It’s not. You’ve done an amazing job taking responsibility for your little ducklings and I won’t take that away from you. I’m happy to help, and I get it. They’re kids, they need to be looked after. But you and me? We can look out for each other. It is not your job to keep me safe. Sweetheart, you’ve gotta stop taking the world on your shoulders. Let me help you. Let Robin and Nancy and Jonathan help. Or it’s going to tear you apart. Please.”
Eddie reaches out to put his hand on top of Steve’s where it rests on the bed.
Steve feels hollowed out. A little numb. He’s so used to taking on everyone else’s problems, he doesn’t know what to do or how to feel about someone else trying to take on his.
“Yeah. Ok. I can try to do that.”
“Well I think you coming here the past couple of nights is good. It kills me that you had to get to your breaking point to reach out to me, but I’m glad you did. I mean it, Stevie. I want to be that person for you. If you’ll let me.”
He’s not sure he deserves this, but he’s going to hold on to it as long as he can.
It takes some convincing, but eventually they decide that Steve will spend his nights at Eddie’s.
While he’s off grabbing some clothes and things, Uncle Wayne arrives home from his visit to his mother’s. Shit. Eddie should probably mention this arrangement to him.
“What’s that look for, son?”
“Uhh…so how do you feel about having a house guest for a bit?”
“Excuse me?”
“My…my friend Steve. He’s not doing super well after the shit we went through. So I don’t really want him to be alone for a bit. His parents aren’t ever home, so…if you’re not cool with it I’ll go to his place, but I don’t think he likes it there much.”
“Oh your ‘friend’, hm?” Wait, you talking about the Harrington’s boy?”
“Yes friend. And yes, Steve Harrington. Why, is that a problem?”
“No, it’s just…Well the Harrington’s ain’t very nice people.”
Eddie scowls. “No, they’re not. But Steve’s not like them.”
“Alright kiddo, put your claws away. I’m not saying he is. I remember that boy sitting by your bedside for weeks in the hospital. He seems like a good kid. He can stay as long as he needs to. You’re a good friend.”
He can feel his cheeks heat. His uncle has always seen the best in him, no matter how much rebelling he’s done. Eddie tries his best to live up to it. He gives the old man a hug.
“Thank you.”
He perks up like a dog when he hears a car pull up to the house. Uncle Wayne snorts. “Mhm. ‘Friend’ my ass.”
Eddie flips him off as he races to the door, ignoring his uncle’s laughter.
Steve shifts uncomfortably in the Munson living room, not having expected Wayne Munson to be home.  He’d honestly forgotten about the man over the past emotional few days.
“I’m sorry, sir, I can go. I didn’t mean to just move in to your house, that’s incredibly rude of me-“
“Son. Breathe. This place has plenty of room. And I work nights so I’m happy for Eddie to have someone to keep him company during the day while I sleep. We have no need for a guest room anyway, so feel free to make it yours.”
They’d talked about him sharing with Eddie, but just being out of his big empty house and being close to Eddie is enough. Knowing he can creep across the hall to see him if he has a nightmare. 
“Ah…actually Uncle Wayne I think he’s gonna stay with me for now.”
Steve knows he’s bright pink, he watches Wayne shoot Eddie a look he can’t decipher, and Eddie glare in return. As if daring him to say something. But the man just nods.
“Make yourself at home, kid.”
“Thank you, sir. I don’t make that much at Family Video, but I’m happy to pay rent. And I promise I’ll clean up after myself, I can do the cooking too.”
“You’re not paying me anything. The house was free I don’t need no money for it. I’m not gonna tell you you can’t cook or clean, but don’t do me no favors. You saved Eddie’s life. You could burn this place to the ground and I’d still be grateful to you.”
He doesn’t know what to say to that. The Munson family seems to be great at rendering him speechless. And heaping praise on him that he doesn’t deserve.
“Oh. Well, uh…I like to cook, in any case. And my parents are…very particular, so cleaning I’m used to. I don’t mind it.”
“Well Eddie sure don’t clean so that’ll be an improvement.”
“Hey!”
Eddie shoves his uncle and they engage in a playful wrestling match. He’s a bit overwhelmed by the familial affection he’s only ever seen on tv. Eddie is clearly a nephew in name only, loved like a son. Like a son should be loved. He has a moment of envy before he squashes it. He’s happy Eddie has this.
Eventually they break apart with laughter. Wayne announces he’s headed to bed, and tells them to behave and stay safe with another significant look to Eddie that Steve doesn’t understand. Whatever it is has Eddie going bright red which is interesting.
Once he’s in his room, Eddie helps Steve bring his stuff into the house. He didn’t bring much, didn’t want to impose, so it’s a quick job.
“Hey, you know you can have the guest room right? I mean even just to put your stuff. A space of your own to get away from me sometimes.”
I don’t want to get away from you, he doesn’t say. Instead he shrugs. “I don’t need that much stuff, I’m fine. I mean if you don’t want to share I totally get it.”
“No! Not at all. I just…all you brought is clothes and stuff. I know you’re not into my music, you didn’t bring any books or anything like that. I want you to be happy here. I don’t want you to make yourself as small as possible to fit.”
He didn’t really realize that’s what he was doing until it’s said out loud.
“Oh. Uh. Yeah, I guess I could…I mean I don’t hate your music you know, it’s not that bad once you get used to it. I don’t think I ever want to hear the song you played in the Upside Down ever again, but yeah. I guess I could go get more stuff later. But to be honest, not much else is mine over there. I guess I’ve been…making myself small for a long time.”
He shrugs like it’s no big deal, but even he knows it really kind of is.
God Eddie’s heart breaks every time Steve casually says something so devastating, like he doesn’t even realize how fucked up it is.
“Steve…you don’t have to tell me, and I get it if after everything we’ve talked about lately you don’t want to, but…You can talk to me about your parents. I just want you to know that.”
“It’s probably not as bad as you think. I mean they’re just…they just don’t care. They had a kid because that’s what you’re supposed to do, not because they wanted to be parents. The messy reality of a child was very distasteful to them. But it only got worse once I got older and wasn’t a perfect trophy kid to brag to their friends about. Too stupid. Too soft. Once I was old enough to reach the stove they started taking off for long periods of time. When they’d come back, there would always be passive aggressive comments about the state of the house or how it looks to their friends that I wasn’t doing this or that. Mostly it’s just…nothing. They just don’t care. They don’t love me, they don’t even like me. After a while I stopped trying. It was a relief that they were gone most of the time even if being in the big empty house on my own sucked.”
“Oh sweetheart…I’m so sorry. You deserve so much better than that. No wonder you don’t know how to ask for what you need, Jesus.” He reaches out and pulls Steve into his arms.
Steve melts into him. He doesn’t cry, doesn’t have any tears left in him. Suddenly he’s exhausted. It’s like Eddie shines a light on all of his darkest parts, drags them to the surface so he can’t ignore them anymore. It’s terrifying to be seen so clearly. Draining. But also a relief. Because Eddie doesn’t just see his worst parts, he soothes them. Takes the fragile pieces and holds them with such tenderness.
So he feels lighter, but also dead on his feet.
“Hey angel, you ok?”
“Mmmm, sleepy.”
“Yeah? Let’s go take a nap then. C’mon.”
Eddie guides him gently to his room, to their room, and he’s out before his head hit the pillow.
Things go smoother after that for a while. Steve’s nightmares don’t miraculously go away, but they do lessen. And now when he wakes Eddie can be there to comfort him.
Their friends notice a difference. They also notice Steve wearing Eddie’s shirts on occasion. Eventually they put the pieces together and Robin pulls Eddie aside.
“Hey, what’s going on with you two? Don’t say nothing I’m not stupid.”
“Why are you asking me and not your platonic life partner?”
“Don’t be cute, Munson, I’m serious. Steve was…not doing well. He’s a lot better now, and he’s also wearing your clothes and honestly I can’t remember the last time you two didn’t arrive somewhere in the same vehicle. Don’t get me wrong, I’m happy he’s looking healthier, but…I also know he’s not as tough as he likes to act like he is. I like you Eddie, but if you’re not serious about whatever it is that’s going on between you two you need to end it now.”
“You don’t know what you’re talking about. It’s not like that.”
Eddie knows she’s coming from a place of love for Steve, so he tries to reign in the anger building in his chest.
“Then tell me what it’s like.”
“Like you said, he wasn’t doing well. He wasn’t sleeping. So he’s staying with me. To get out of that big empty house, and to have someone to help him sleep.”
She softens, her face falling. “Why didn’t he tell me?”
“I don’t know. You’d have to ask him.”
“I’m sorry, Eddie. I didn’t mean…I’ve just seen how you’ve flirted with him. And he can’t take some fling right now. I don’t think Steve really knows how to do casual. I just don’t want him to get hurt.”
“Robin…Even if he was into guys, into me, I wouldn’t do that. I would never hurt him.”
Now she’s looking at him with something like confusion mixed with pity.
“Oh. Ok. That’s…hm. Yeah I’ll talk to him. Sorry again Eddie, thanks for looking out for him.”
He feels like he’s missed something important, but for the life of him can’t figure out what.
It all changes after a particularly brutal nightmare. Steve wakes up screaming and flailing wildly until Eddie pins his arms down beside him.
“Shhh, baby, woah. It’s ok, you’re ok. Open your eyes, look at me. It’s Eddie, I’m right here. I’m not going anywhere.”
He feels one arm released, a hand trailing across his jaw. He does as he’s told to see Eddie hovering over him, and suddenly the nightmare is the last thing on his mind.
Eddie’s voice fails him as he realizes Steve has gone very still. He thinks this is it. The moment he’s stepped over that clear line. He said too much. He touched too much. He was too focused on calming Steve to remember to keep his filter up.
Then he sees the look in Steve’s eyes, those pupils blown wide. Oh. Oh.
It’s a risk. He’s balancing on the edge of a knife, one wrong step and he’ll end up bleeding. But he can’t help himself.
Gently, because god Steve deserves to be handled with care, he shifts his thumb to trail across his bottom lip. He feels the shuddering inhale as Steve parts his lips, opens up so pretty for Eddie.
And Eddie is hypnotized. Powerless to prevent himself from swaying in closer. He stops only an inch away.
“Can I kiss you?”
The words barely escape before Steve closes the gap. He feels the hand Eddie’s not using to hold him self up slide back to his jaw to cradle his face. Eddie’s lips part against his, tongue sliding in to meet Steve’s. 
Steve’s own fingers tangle in that wild mane of hair, pulling him down closer. He feels out of control, never thought he could have this. He isn’t sure how long he will. So he wants it all. He moves one hand down to slide up under Eddie’s shirt, desperate to touch.
Eddie pulls back, trying to hold onto his senses against the whirlwind beneath him. Steve may be into men, which is making his brain short circuit, but Eddie’s still pretty sure he’s never been with one.
“Easy, easy baby. Steve…I would be perfectly happy to spend the night kissing you. Hell I’m thrilled just to fall asleep next to you. We don’t have to do anything you’re not ready for.”
Steve slides both hands to his back, gripping his shirt desperately like he thinks Eddie’s going to make a run for it. “I want you.”
“I want you too. I want you so fucking much, you have no idea. But wanting something an being ready for it aren’t the same thing.”
“I mean it’s not like I’m a virgin—“
“Steve. Being ok with one thing with one person doesn’t mean you’re ok with anything else with anyone else. Listen” he presses a quick gentle kiss to Steve’s lips, trying to tamp down the rage he feels building at the though that no one had asked Steve how he felt, if he was ok, if he wanted things to keep going…”Baby I’m not going anywhere. We can take this as slow as you need.”
“This isn’t…I mean, we haven’t…how do you know you’ll want to do it again?”
Eddie’s heart aches when he sees the look on the face below him. Resigned, scared, hurting. Fuck, did Steve think this was some one off fling? As if Eddie could even think of walking away.
He’d do anything for this man, anything to wipe the pain from his eyes. So putting his heart on the line…well, he’d rather break himself than let Steve hurt.
“Oh sweetheart…don’t you know I’m so fucking gone on you? We could never do more than kiss and I’d still be here. This is about so much more than sex. What do <em>you</em> want <em>right now</em>?”
There was a look of awe shining back at him. Maybe his heart was safe after all. ��Could we…” Steve’s face was pink as he looked away.
Eddie tips his chin up once more so their eyes meet. “I may not say yes, but you’ve gotta know nothing you ask for could scare me away from you baby. Just ask.”
“I want…I just want to feel you. Please.” He thrusts up to make his point.
Normally Eddie requires a bit more of a direct request, but he can work with this.
“That’s a good boy.” He grins as hears Steve’s breath hitch. God this man is going to be the end of him. “One condition.”
“Anything.”
“At any point you want to stop, you say stop. You want to slow down, you say so. Do not for a second put what you think I want above your needs. Because what I want more than anything is to take care of you. To make you feel good. Do you understand?” He needs Steve to know his consent matters too, that he matters. Always.
Steve nods.
“I need you to say the words baby. I need to know you really hear me.”
“I understand. I won’t do anything I’m not 100% sure I want to do.”
“So good for me, Princess.” He leans down to press a biting kiss to that pretty blush as it travels down his neck. Then he pushes Steve’s shirt up so he can finally see how far down it goes.
Steve is quick to sit up and remove his shirt entirely. But when he lays back down, his arms go across his torso and he looks ashamed.
“Hey gorgeous, why are you hiding from me?” He trails a finger down one arm gently.
“I just…scars. The bats…they didn’t heal good.”
“Oh Steve…you’re fucking perfect. Don’t for a second think any scar could change that. Look, we match.” He lifts his shirt and gestures down to his own side.
Steve glances down at the scar from the wound that almost killed him. One arm uncurls from its protective hold so he can touch. Eddie inhales sharply at the sensation. The hand jerks back.
“I’m sorry-“
“Shh babe it’s fine, it doesn’t hurt anymore. It’s just…sensitive. Feels nice, actually.” He grins. “Pretty sure you could touch me anywhere and it would feel good.”
Steve finally moves both arms, no longer hiding his body from view. And <em>oh</em> what a view it is. Eddie remembers the fleeting glimpses he took when Steve stripped his shirt off to check out Water Gate, but he had tried not to stare too hard. His memory pales in comparison to the gorgeous man beneath him. He feels fingers trailing up his torso as Steve bites his lip.
Taking the hint, he leans back to tug his own shirt fully off.
Steve is staring. He’s allowed to do that now. And he can’t help but be captivated by the man above him. It’s hard to hold on to his insecurity when he realizes how he feels looking at Eddie’s scars. It’s a complicated mix of emotions. Part of him feels sad seeing the evidence left behind from that night. There’s relief because he’s still here, those wounds got the chance to heal into these scars. There’s awe at the bravery. Eddie may feel like a coward for running before, but the second there was something he could actually do he was a hero.
Then there’s the other feelings. The fire in his belly. He’s never been one to find scars sexy and he really shouldn’t now. But Eddie is magnificent. And these marks on his skin do nothing to detract from his beauty. They enhance it. Show how strong he is, a reminder of all he’s overcome.
When he finally drags his gaze back up to meet Eddie’s, he’s faced with a predatory grin. It sends delightful chills down his spine. Oh how he wants to be devoured.
He pushes himself up, gets his hands back into that lovely mane of curls and pulls Eddie to him. He is on fire, could melt from the heat of the mouth that collides with his. The soft, gentle kiss from before is gone. Eddie kisses like his life depends on it, nipping teeth and curling tongue. Steve has never been kissed like this and it leaves him reeling.
He is gasping for breath, collapsing back into the pillows when those teeth trail down to his neck. His hips thrust up and he moans when he brushes against hardness. Eddie lifts his own hips up and away. “Oh god…Eddie.” His voice is barely above a whisper.
A biting kiss where his neck meets his shoulder is followed by a soothing tongue. “Yes, baby?”
“Please! I need…” He can’t find the words, he is lost.
“Mmmm, go on. Tell me what you need sweetheart. Let me hear you.” Steve whines in response. “That’s very pretty, but I need words.”
“Please, god, please…I need…just touch me.”
He is rewarded with thigh pressed between his legs, giving him a delicious pressure to rub against. It’s good, it’s so good, but it’s not enough. He fumbles with the button to Eddie’s pants, pausing for permission.
Eddie almost laughs and Steve’s hesitation, like he would ever say no to him. He nods his consent, then helps get his pants down his legs and kicks them off. Then reaches to do the same for Steve.
When there’s nothing but two thin layers of cloth separating them, it’s his turn to pause.
“Are you sure about this?”
Steve lets out another one of those delicious little whines. “God yes, please don’t stop.”
Eddie nips that pretty little pouting mouth. This man will be the death of him, he’s sure of it. But oh what a way to go.
He slips his hand beneath the waistband of Steve’s boxers, trailing across his hip. Steve lifts up, almost daring Eddie to slide them down. Eddie’s never been very good at resisting temptation. He gives in to the challenge easily, moaning at the glorious sight. Steve has the prettiest cock he’s ever seen.
Eddie’s known he was gay for a long time, and he’s had his fair share of hookups. He’s given blowjobs before and enjoyed bringing his partner pleasure. But he’s never been particularly into the act itself. So he’s a bit surprised at the overwhelming desire to get his mouth on the man below him.
He puts the thoughts aside to explore another time. For now he slides his own boxers off and rolls his hips down, finally feeling skin against skin.
Steve had worried, just a little, that being with a man would scare him. He wanted Eddie so bad, but he feared the reality of it would overwhelm him. It does, but not at all in a bad way. Eddie is undeniably masculine, all angles and hardness where the girls he’s been with were curves and softness.
Rather than being distressed, he is toe-curlingly turned on. When he feels Eddie take both of them in hand, he almost blacks out. He bites his lip to contain the noises that try to escape him.
“Don’t hold back, gorgeous, let me hear those pretty sounds.” He moans, unable to deny Eddie anything.
“Fuck. Eddie.”
Steve whines when Eddie lets go, only to sigh in relief when he licks his palm before getting them back in his hand. He seems to be doing his best to wring as many noises out of Steve as possible.
It doesn’t take very long for him to be close.
“Gonna come for me pretty boy? Go on, let me see you.”
That’s all it takes for him to be releasing all over Eddie. The feel of it seems to be enough for Eddie to follow him.
When he returns to his body, Eddie is already cleaning them both up. Gentle, he’s always so gentle. He’s also avoiding Steve’s eyes and looks nervous.
Eddie’s cursing himself for not talking this through a bit more before diving in head first. Robin said she didn’t think Steve knew how to do casual, but what if she was wrong?
It will destroy him to be a casual fling for Steve.
“Eddie? What’s wrong? Do you…was that bad? Did I do something wrong?”
“No, baby, not at all. That was amazing. You’re amazing. I just…we should probably talk. About what that means going forward.”
“What do you mean?”
“I mean…what do you want, Stevie? What do you want from me?”
Steve furrows his brow and under normal circumstances he’d find the confusion adorable but right now it just makes his heart ache.
“I want everything.”
“Everything?”
“Eddie, I…I love you. It’s ok if that’s not how you feel but yeah I want everything. I want to be with you.”
He can’t stop the giddy laughter that explodes out of him. He tries to calm down when he sees the shocked hurt on Steve’s face.
“No! I’m sorry, I’m not laughing at you sweetheart. I love you so much it fucking hurts. I just…Jesus, Steve I thought you were straight. I thought platonic cuddle buddies was the best thing I could ever have. This is just…more than I could have ever hoped for.”
“I do like girls. Turns out I like both. Robin says I’m bisexual. I guess I’ve noticed other guys before but you…you’re the first guy I’ve ever wanted. Scared the shit out of me. Especially once I moved in here. You’re my person, Eddie. You’re so fucking important to me and I was terrified of losing you. I’ve never felt like this before.”
“Me either. Steve listen…I want to be with you, so bad. But I need you to know…no matter what I’ll always be here for you. I love you and I want to be with you for the rest of my life, but if that doesn’t happen I will always be your friend. Always.”
He means it, from the bottom of his heart.
Things aren’t magically perfect after that. Steve’s nightmares are fading, but they still happen. They get into fights, and Steve sleeps in the guest room. But so far each time one of them will crawl into bed with the other in the middle of the night, whispered apologies and they fix it. 
Steve still hasn’t told his parents he’s moved out, and they haven’t been home to notice.
They haven’t told their friends yet, haven’t even come out to them. But Robin knows and she helps them hide it until they’re ready to share it with everyone else.
So it’s not perfect, but it’s theirs. And they’re both happier than they’ve ever been. That’s all that matters.
268 notes · View notes
daryl-dixon-daydreams · 3 years ago
Photo
Tumblr media Tumblr media Tumblr media
Words: 6,188 Pairing: Daryl Dixon x Reader Reader pronouns: she/her Era: Alexandria, pre-Negan + flashbacks in other eras Warnings: language, fear and anxiety, mention of fear of heights Summary: Y/N and Daryl head out on the run for the requested medical supplies. Things are tense, but possibly about to get worse... This part is written in Daryl's POV!
Your name: submit What is this?
* * *
“I ain’t waitin’. I got a whiff of him and I gotta go before it disappears.”
“Daryl, are you sure about this?” Carol pressed him, creases from worry between her eyebrows. “Are you sure you’ve really thought this through?”
“What is there to think through? If he finds her again, he’ll kill her. And I ain’t waitin’ around for that to happen.” The archer was a blur of activity, gathering his gear and shoving it into his pack.
“I think you need to talk to her about this,” Carol insisted, relinquishing her hold on his poncho somewhat unwillingly as Daryl pulled it from her hands.
He shook his head. “Nah. Ya know she’ll want to be there and I can’t risk that…” he trailed off. “I can’t risk—can’t risk that.”
A thick silence stretched for a moment and Carol wrung her hands. “Well, what are you going to tell her?”
He paused, his hands on the clasp of his pack. “I ain’t tellin’ her anythin’. I’ll leave before its light tomorrow. By the time everyone is up, I’ll be gone.”
“What am I supposed to tell her then? When she inevitably asks?” Carol pressed him. “You want me to lie to her too?”
“I ain’t lyin’,” Daryl snapped. “‘M just not—not tellin’ her everythin’. ‘M ending this so she can move on.”
Carol’s jaw tensed. “It feels like a lie.”
“Just tell her I went north. To see what I could see. Lookin’ for supplies,” he drawled, setting his pack and crossbow on the ground beside his bed. “I don’t know.”
Carol sighed heavily and shook her head as he straightened up. “I don’t think this is—”
“Look, tell her whatever ya want. Just wait until ‘m gone. This is happenin’. It’ll be done. S’gonna be over with. For good.”
She shook her head and gave him a long look before crossing his cell and gently clasping his shoulder. “Be careful. I mean it,” she said, surrendering to the fact that there would be no changing his mind. He nodded, pulling his bottom lip in between his teeth for a moment.
“I will.”
Carol gave him one last look full of anxiety and left him.
* * *
I hardly slept. Maybe caught 20 minutes here and 15 minutes there. Anxiety about the run—that’s all it was. At least, that’s what I kept tellin’ myself. Wanderin’ into a hospital was about the dumbest shit we could do. They always promised to be loaded with unexpected bullshit and floods of undead assholes. But lyin’ flat on my back in the dark, I knew deep down it had a helluva lot more to do with her than it had to do with the run. I was tryin’ to remember the last time I’d spent more than ten minutes alone with her and it left me with a feelin’ like somebody had dropped a damn lead weight onto my chest. I turned over in bed in an attempt to throw it off, but it still sat there on my lungs. I knew exactly when we’d last been alone for longer than a few minutes. Of course I fuckin’ knew. It was burned into my goddamn memory.
But it wasn’t doin’ me a lick of good to think on it so I pushed it away and waited for the clock beside me to read 5:15 before I climbed out of bed. My gear was all waitin’ ready, except for pickin’ up a gun on the way out. I half-expected to run into her in the armory, but it was dark and empty when I grabbed a handgun and some ammo. It felt like a lonely walk to Aaron’s, up the empty street, dew heavy on the grass, and my bootsteps echoing loudly off the dark rows’a houses. I never feel right in here… with the square little lawns and lights on by the front doors. It just felt fake, like somebody had built paper houses and was plannin’ to light ‘em up to burn any minute. I couldn’t feel settled. I just felt… lost. Outta place. Like I didn’t belong.
I’d gotten rid of that feelin’ once… My mind drifted back to her like it always did. It was like I didn’t have no damn control over my own mind. She’d been the one who’d made me feel like I belonged. But now? Fuck. I’m doin’ it again. Focus, dumbass.
She wasn’t waitin’ by my bike either, so I rode up to the gate. As the lookout platform came into view, I caught sight of her climbing down, followed by Gabriel. Her pack was slung on her back, a shotgun hanging at her side and her favorite pistol in a holster on her thigh. I found myself chewing the inside of my cheek. Nerves. Anxiety. This was gonna be a long fuckin’ day.
“I’ve got the gate,” Gabriel said, heading for the latch. She wandered over and I felt a jolt when she met my eyes. I nudged my nose up in a nod, but she just looked back at me with that same stony expression. Unreadable. It always seemed like I never saw her smile anymore. Maybe she did, just not around me. I got that blank look or a glare that I probably deserved…
“Were ya on watch?” I asked, curious why she wouldn’ta gotten rid of her shift in favor of sleep, knowing we’d be heading out on a run early.
“No,” she said simply. No extra info. Typical. Why waste more on me when one word would do? She didn’t owe me nothin’. And she knew it. I swallowed my other questions and leaned forward on my bike so she could climb on. I felt her settle in behind me and glanced over my shoulder at her. She caught my eyes for a brief moment before looking away, down toward the ground. That was typical too. It was like she just couldn’t look at me. Felt like somebody twisted a blade in my chest every time she dodged me like that. And yet I couldn’t get enough of her, even if she was purposely a giant pain in the ass most of the damn time… I still felt like she was a mirage in a desert. A mouthful of cool water in a drought. Food for a starvin’ man.
Gabriel was waiting with the gate open, so I revved the bike to life again. Her arms wrapped around my waist to hold on and for a second I thought I felt her cheek press against the back of my shoulder, but I knew I must have imagined it. My heart was racing as we pulled out. I was more anxious than I had been all night. The thoughts rushing through my head moved so fast I couldn’t even focus on any of them.
Gabriel yelled at us to be safe as we moved through, kickin’ dust up that left a glowing red cloud behind from the reflection of the taillights. The ride to the city was smooth. We made good time, luckily only passing lone walkers or small herds that were easy to avoid. Around the curves, for a brief moment, she’d hold tighter to me and lean into the turns like I’d taught her in what felt like another fuckin’ lifetime. Each corner I could feel every individual fingertip pressing into my waist or stomach. It was always followed by a sudden wash of heat like somebody had shoved me in a shower with the temperature all the way up. I couldn’t control it. Didn’t matter how hard I tried to ignore the feelin’ of being so damn close against each other…
I slowed down as we neared the hospital. Cars sat rusting in gridlocked traffic, tires long gone, frozen in time—same place they were when everythin’ shut the fuck down. I slowed my bike to roll over some debris and hit a chunk of concrete a little harder than I meant to. Her arms tightened around me reflexively at the jolt before loosening again the next second. My heart jolted at the same time. That feeling… of her clinging onto me for safety—but fuck. Let’s not make it out to be more than it is, dumbass. I turned toward my left shoulder. “Sorry,” I murmured. She didn’t say anything back, just shifted in her place behind me, puttin’ an inch more space back between us. The hospital came into view ahead, tall over everything else on the block.
She tapped my arm and I turned so I could hear her over the engine. “We should park. Sound of the bike,” she said. I knew what she was thinkin’. Any walkers or people anywhere around would hear us. I turned down a side street and parked in a loading dock bay. She climbed off about as damn fast as she could. Kicking the kickstand out and swinging my leg over, she was already walking back toward the corner of the building to look down the street.
“Hold up,” I called after her. I still had to get my gear off the back. She either didn’t hear me or didn’t give a shit and I found myself gritting my teeth. But when I rushed around the corner, I nearly collided with her. She did wait. She was leaned up against the brick, her shotgun in her hands, staring ahead at the looming building.
She straightened up as I stopped beside her and we started windin’ our way down the last couple blocks, keepin’ to the shadows of the buildings, stayin’ in cover as best we could. Even so, I couldn’t help glancin’ up at the endless windows, too many high points. All it would take is one asshole with a rifle and a scope... My hands started to sweat as I gripped my crossbow. I glanced at her, but she was as stony-faced as ever. “C’mon,” I said, quickening my stride. “I wanna get the hell off this street.”
I heard her let out a small scoff behind me. “Yeah, you’re the only one worried about being out here,” she murmured. My teeth clenched again but I did my best to ignore it. There was no point gettin’ riled up this early in the day. We still had a lot of fuckin’ work to do. We reached a set of double doors on the side of the hospital, but one glance inside showed they were well barricaded. I stood there rubbing a hand over the stubble on my face. “S’try the south door,” I drawled. To my surprise, she didn’t argue. But that side was a fuckin’ bust too. “Shit,” I spat out. There was a tall cabinet blocking the entrance.
“Good call,” she said sarcastically.
I shot her a glare. And this time when I bit my cheek, I tasted blood. “Ya got a better fuckin’ idea? Huh?” I challenged her.
She rolled her eyes, studying the door for a moment. There was a large glass pane above it that was broken out and I saw her eyes lock in on it. “Boost me up there,” she said, inclining her chin to indicate the window.
Did she want to go in alone? Well, that sure as shit wasn’t fuckin’ happenin’. “Like hell,” I growled back. She rolled her eyes again.
“Just boost me through and I’ll get the door open. I’ll let you in.”
Now it was my turn to scoff. “Ya gonna move that cabinet? By yerself?” I asked skeptically. The muscle in her jaw tensed.
“I don’t have to move it far. Just enough to let you squeeze in. And you can help from the outside.”
I pulled my bottom lip in between my teeth. I didn’t like the idea. I paced a tight circle, thinkin’, as she shifted impatiently beside me. “What if ya get in there and there are walkers? Huh? We can’t see shit down the hall.”
“I’ll be quiet. Come on. We haven’t got all fucking day and we’re sitting ducks out here. Unless you’ve come up with something better—”
I didn’t like it, but she was right. Shit. “Fine,” I interrupted. She leaned her shotgun up against the wall as I set my back against the door, fingers locked together and hands low at my bent knee. “C’mon. Gimme yer foot.”
She seemed to hesitate and I wondered if she was having second thoughts, but the next moment she stepped close in front of me and her hands came to my shoulders. “Ready?” I asked. Her face was maybe six inches from mine, her hands light. I started to feel warm again, a flush of heat across the back of my neck that started spillin’ into my chest. I could see every fleck of color in her eyes, the upturned curve of her eyelashes, that little scar on her chin... Fuck. Focus.
“Ready.” She planted her boot in my hands and I boosted her up so she could grab the window edge. The tinkling of glass dropping in was all I could hear for a moment, and then her weight disappeared from my hands. Spinning around, I watched her pull herself through onto the top of the cabinet. She stayed perched there for a moment, glancin’ behind her, scoutin’ the hallway, before she dropped to her feet lightly. She made it look easy. Graceful.
I couldn’t stand still, constantly shifting my weight. I watched her face tighten as she wedged her shoulder into the cabinet, using all her weight, and it started to move at an angle away from the door. I pushed in with my shoulder from the outside and we finally had enough space for me to slip through. I passed her shotgun through first before turnin’ sideways and slidin’ in. It was dark and completely silent except for the sound of our own breathin’. It felt stuffy inside, and I could vaguely smell somethin’ sharp like animal piss and a sickeningly sweet smell. Death. Decay. I paused to draw the string on my crossbow back, cocking it ready to fire, a bolt nestled in the flight groove.
She pulled her flashlight out from the side pocket of her pack and clicked it on, shining it partially up the hallway ahead. “Jesus…” Her boots crunched over broken glass. She adjusted the shoulder strap of her shotgun, her eyes fixed down the hall, following the moving beam of her light. “This place is a fucking wreck,” she whispered. In her distraction, her tone lacked the usual hostility or sarcasm.
“Somethin’ went down since we were last here,” I agreed. There was a lot more debris and furniture toppled over and strewn about. A lot of obstacles to a clean getaway if we had to make one. “Let’s just get this done and get the hell out.”
“What a unique idea…” she remarked over her shoulder. There it was. Damn sarcasm was back.
I couldn’t help rolling my eyes and movin’ past her so I was in the lead. I knew it would annoy her, but I secretly wanted to be the one in the line of fire if somethin’ was crooked. I headed for the stairwell, pullin’ my own flashlight out and shinin’ it inside before I tried the door. It looked clear. “Upper floors are more likely to have shit left. Let’s go.”
We moved in silence. I could feel her ghosting behind me the whole way, almost mimicking my movements. This was the first time the two of us had been alone on a run since… since I dun even know when. But despite it being so goddamn long, we weren’t out of step. Once we started movin’ it was like no damn time had passed. We fell right back into our old rhythm. I knew her and she knew me. We worked well together when she put aside her need to argue with everythin’ I said. It still felt like we each knew what the other was thinkin’. Not that I expected this run would magically make working together bearable again for good, or solve anything, but at least we could if we had to. I also now was realizin’ this whole thing was probably orchestrated by Rick. Did Denise really need the supplies? Sure. But did it have to be Y/N and I gettin’ ‘em? Alone? Fuck no. I dunno exactly what he was hopin’ for but I’m pretty sure he’ll be disappointed…
Moving steadily upwards, we had most of the supplies on the list, plus plenty of extra finds, but I was growing more and more uneasy as we went on. We hadn’t run into a single fucking walker yet, and to me that meant they were probably herded up in a massive hoard somewhere. It felt like a matter of time before we found them or they found us. I could sense Y/N’s tension risin’ again too. She was more fidgety, more careful about each step she took. I found myself frequently sweeping my eyes back behind us to make sure nothin’ was lurking just outta the flashlight beams. There were the usual signs of walkers nearby; smears of blood on the floor and walls, that fuckin’ smell ya could never get outta yer nose, even chunks of flesh from the rottin’ fuckers. But we still hadn’t seen one, and I was fuckin’ worried.
“Almost got everything,” Y/N whispered to me, shoving a couple more bottles into her pack. “We just need to find the CPAP machine,” she murmured, staring down at the list. “I don’t have a fucking clue what the hell that looks like.” She glanced over at me, one of her eyebrows quirked in a question and I realized she was waitin’ for some kinda response.
“What? Yer lookin’ at me? I ain’t got a goddamn clue what the hell that even is,” I said gruffly. Shit. I saw it. Just for a second, but one corner of her lips twitched up in a smile and I swear there was a spark in her eyes—like the ones I used to see in her all the time. My heart jumped and I tried my best to ignore it. She seemed to turn away, hidin’ her face right as I was puzzlin’ over it.
“Right… well, let’s try down the hall. There’s probably another supply closet at the other end,” she said, nudging her head toward the darkness ahead.
We made our way cautiously. I pushed into the lead again and was surprised when she didn’t argue. I tried every door handle but most of ‘em just led to empty or trashed patient rooms. I caught her frozen in the doorway of one that had a massive bloodstain on the floor and spatter partially up the walls. Her eyes were wide and vacant, and I wondered what she was reliving. “Hey,” I said, just over her shoulder. She seemed to pull out of it abruptly and she turned away, moving on like nothin’ had happened. I let her go ahead, mainly so I could keep an eye on her for a minute and make sure she still had her head in the game, but I didn’t need to worry. Not about that anyway. She’d always been tough. She wasn’t shaken by shit easily. I knew that. And yet I still had this drive to want to protect her, even though she didn’t need it from me. And she definitely didn’t want it from me.
“Here,” she said suddenly, slinging her gun back on her shoulder and more fully opening the door to a small supply closet. There was hardly enough room for her to stand inside, so I posted up just behind her and strained my eyes and ears for anythin’. “It’s all electronic stuff,” she whispered, entirely focused at the task at hand. Her hands floated from one device to the next, illuminated by her flashlight. She was looking for some label or model number or somethin’ to tell her what they were. She bent down and grabbed some scattered papers from among the boxes on the floor. Swearing under her breath she held one up to the flashlight. “Of course the cover and all the useful shit in the front is torn off,” she muttered. She was bending down to grab another handful when there was some sudden, deep noise on the floor above us.
My heart seemed to stall out for a moment and she straightened up and froze, her eyes lifted toward the ceiling, lips partially parted. The sound seemed to reverberate through the building. I could feel it beneath my feet. It resonated through the walls. After a moment, I was looking at her and she glanced over and met my eyes, her eyebrows a little furrowed with worry.
“What the fuck was that?” she asked in a harsh whisper. I only shook my head. She gulped and refocused, shakin’ it off, focusing back on the papers. She was flipping page after page, scanning them as fast as she could.
I started to hear some more noises above us and then eventually spilling toward the other end of the hall. My grip on my crossbow tightened. “We need to move,” I said, keeping my voice low.
She was still intensely focused on the manual in her hands. “Just gimme a minute…” she said vaguely.
I shifted, turning more toward the far end of the hallway, straining my hearing. There was more clattering above us. “We might not have another damn minute.”
“Just—hold on—”
Fuck. I stood frozen for a moment as a herd of walkers started to spill out from the stairwell at the other end of the hallway and start toward us. “We ain’t got a minute, Y/N!” I urged in a harsh whisper. She didn’t seem to hear me.
There were more walkers than I could count. They hadn’t spotted us yet but I had to move fast, so I did the only damn thing I could think of and pushed her forward into the closet, pressing in after her and shutting the door as quietly as I could. I instinctively clicked my flashlight off and hurried to grab hers and do the same, plunging the two of us into darkness in that small space.
“Daryl, what the hell?!” she snapped at me. She’d been so focused she was completely oblivious to the mass of dead wandering our way. The goddamn closet was so small I had no choice but to be pressed into her… My heart started to pound and I think it had more to do with her against me than the undead assholes outside. I was sure she’d be able to feel it and prayed she’d just think it was adrenaline or somethin’. “What the fuck are you doing?!”
I shoved my hand over her mouth, all my patience gone. Did she really think I’d shoved her in a closet for the hell of it? “For once in yer goddamn life just shut up!” I growled in a low voice. She seemed to tense against me but in the quiet the sounds of the walkers outside the door were now easily heard above our ragged breathin’ and they were growing louder every second. I still had one hand over her mouth and the other clenching my crossbow at my side. She shifted against me and pulled my hand away. I could hear and feel her breathin’ pick up pace. I planted my palm on the wall behind her, next to her head, very aware of the growin’ heat pooling between the two of us where we were pressed together. The air felt suffocatin’. I started to worry the walkers outside the door would be able to hear my breathin’ I was so nervous. I wanted to shift, move away from her like I’m sure she wanted… I wanted to change positions and get my bow up, but it was impossible.
She didn’t seem to know where to put her arms within the tight, dark space. I couldn’t blame her. I was leaned in against her, sorta over her even. I felt her hand accidentally brush my arm and my body jolted a little at the contact, like some reflex I didn’t know I had. My teeth ground together. After that she seemed to settle away from me, into the wall behind her.
We had to just stay there, fuckin’ frozen, hardly room to breathe while the hoard passed by. Every once and a while, a body would thump hard against the door and I’d feel her flinch. I could feel sweat dripping down my neck and beading up on my face, my hair sticking to it. We were so close I could feel her breath against my skin when she faced toward me. I felt the rhythm of her breathin’. And I couldn’t ignore the fact that in that tiny ass closet, the only thing I could smell was the faint scent of her shampoo. I tried hard not to notice, but I’d be lyin’ if I said I didn’t try to put some name to the smell. Lavender? Not quite. Maybe more like rose? I dunno. And despite the possible death lurking just outside, I found it hard to focus on anythin' other than the feeling of her against me.
It felt like it took hours for the hoard to pass, but it was probably only ten minutes. But after the sounds drifted away we were still left with a big fuckin’ problem. They had to go somewhere, and my best guess was that they were travelin’ down.
It was so dark in there I couldn’t even tell if my fuckin’ eyes were open or closed, and it seemed to be makin’ it hard to think… Or maybe the angle of her one hip pressed into me was—fuck. Get it together, man… I fumbled for and clicked on my flashlight, findin' the two of us both wincin' at the sudden glare, noses almost touchin'. She was lookin’ up at me, her lips softly parted, her expression only full of concern for once, that little worry line she always gets near her eyebrow.
We both stayed like for a second. I guess just struck by actually seein’ how close we were in the sudden light, until finally she tore her eyes away and turned her head.
I tried to clear my throat, worried my voice was gonna come out soundin' strained or somethin’. “Uhh… sounded like they were goin’—”
“—down. Yeah,” she finished.
My eyes traced the angle of her jawline as she kept her face turned away from me. I heard the paper manual crinkle in her hand and groped for the doorknob behind me. “Yeah,” I agreed quietly. “So, we got a problem about gettin’ out.” My hand finally landed on the doorknob and I turned it and slowly opened the door on the hall, checking both directions carefully but also feelin’ like if I didn’t put some damn space between the two of us again I was about to explode. It looked clear and I stepped out. Glancin’ back, she still seemed frozen, up against the wall, her face turned away toward her shoulder so I couldn’t really get a read on her. “Hey. What is it?” I prompted her.
“Hmm?” She seemed to snap back to herself. “N—nothing…” She went back to searching the manual in her hand, like nothin’ had fuckin’ happened. Just one goddamn time I’d like to know what the fuck is goin’ on inside her head… But I ain’t got no right to that. She’s made that pretty fuckin’ clear.
It wasn’t the right manual or the right machine. But she went through two more until she found it. “Got it,” she announced, waving the paper at me before shoving it into her already full duffel bag. She seized a small machine from the shelf and started trying to rearrange items to make it fit in her pack.
“I got room,” I said, still nervously checkin’ over my shoulder. I thought I could hear the hoard moving below us, maybe two floors down.
“It’s fine. I can make it fit,” she said, jostling more stuff in her bag.
I rolled my eyes and grabbed the damn thing from her, slinging my crossbow strap over my shoulder. “Ya’d really rather split yer pack at the seams than take any fuckin’ help from me,” I murmured. I didn’t wait for an answer. I didn’t need one…
She stepped out of the closet and I caught her wiping her forearm across her forehead. It left a smear of dirt near her hairline. I had to pull myself back to the present. “So, how are we getting out of here?” she asked, adjusting her pack and the duffel bag strap on her shoulder.
I glanced at her, knowing she wasn’t gonna like my idea.
She rolled her eyes. “Well, you’ve obviously got something. Just get on with it.”
“Fire escape,” I said.
I watched the muscle in her jaw twitch as he jaw clenched. “Fuckin’ great…”
“Unless ya got somethin’ else—”
“You know I don’t,” she snapped back at me. She wiped a hand across her forehead again, swiping away fresh drops of sweat. “It’s—” She cut herself off. “Let’s just go,” she sighed, defeated.
I looked at her for a second more, trying to gauge just how freaked out she was, but it didn’t seem to matter. We didn’t have any other options.
“Let’s go,” she snapped again. “Before I change my mind about being able to handle this.”
“It ain’t—”
She squeezed her eyes shut and I watched her body tense. “I swear to god, Dixon, if you say ‘It ain’t that bad’ or ‘It ain’t that high’ right now, I will lose my shit and attract every fucking walker in this goddamn building. I don’t even give a fuck.” Her jaw muscle twitched.
I couldn’t help letting out a sigh that was more of a growl than anything but then I turned and headed for the window a couple doors down that I’d noticed was busted out. Leaning through, I scanned the outside of the building for a fire escape. Nothing on that side.
“It’s probably around the other side. Let’s try the end of the hall,” she suggested. Her boots stayed rooted to the floor and I glanced at her again. She caught my eyes and must have read the concern on my face.
“I’m fine. You’re the last person I need worrying about me,” she growled.
Fuck. She could be infuriating… I found my hand clenching and unclenching a few times before I followed her back out of the room.
She was right. There was a fire escape down that side. I grabbed a piece of metal off the floor and straightened up. “Ya ready?” I asked one more time. “They might hear this glass break so we gotta fuckin’ move.” I thought her hands were a bit shaky.
“Just do it,” she said. And this time, I could hear the quiver in her voice.
I smashed the window and knocked out the glass before pullin' myself through. The metal grates rattled under my boots and she looked suddenly sick as she approached the window sill. I hesitated a second before reaching a hand out to help her through.
“I’m fine,” she said. She didn’t look fine, but she gripped the ledge and climbed out. “Oh, fuck. Fuck…” she muttered as her feet landed on the platform. She was keeping her eyes fixed straight out. Even just the metal grates at th prison used to freak her out, and that was one floor.
I wanted to comfort her but… I wasn’t dumb enough to think it’d help or that she wanted me to, so instead I just started down the stairs at a good pace. She followed stiffly behind me, gripping onto the railing with white knuckles and falling behind.
Every once and a while I’d glance back and she looked like she was about to be sick, but she was still following. We hit a snag as we reached the third-floor platform. A large part of it had rusted and fallen away, leaving a gaping hole we would have to edge around to reach the next set of stairs.
“Oh, you’ve gotta be fucking kidding me.” I heard her behind me and when I looked back her eyes were wide and round and she was clutching onto the railing like it was a lifeline.
“S’fine. I’ll cross first. Just keep over—”
“Oh, really, Daryl? I should keep over to the side? You mean I should stay away from the huge fucking hole in the goddamn floor?” It kept drawing her eyes and I’d see her rip them back up and away, reeling.
I knew that was mostly coming from the fact that she was fuckin’ terrified, but every harsh word from her still stung. “Fine. Clearly, yer good,” I spat back. “Ya don’t need me and ya don’t give a shit and yer fine. I fuckin’ got it.” So much for trying to calm her down. I edged past the hole in the metal grating and went down the next set of stairs. Finally, I just had to push down the ladder, climb down, and we’d be on solid ground again. But when I looked back up, she was still frozen where she had been, on the far side of the platform. I watched her for another minute, waiting to see if she’d move. I knew she wasn’t gonna ask for help, not from me, but she obviously needed it and tough shit, I’m the only damn person here. I rubbed a hand across the back of my neck, anxious to even try again, and climbed back up. I edged past the rusted-out hole and stopped next to her. “Just gimme yer hand.” She didn’t loosen her grip on the railing, and her eyes landed on my face. “S’fine. Just for two seconds, lemme fuckin’ help ya.”
Her chest was heaving with fearful breaths and I guess the idea of tryin’ to cross along that edge alone was worse than puttin’ her hand in mine. Part of me still thought she’d take the heights over me, but she didn’t… She pried her hand off the railing and placed it into mine. I—I can’t say my heart didn’t jump when my fingers closed around it. The motorcycle. The fuckin’ closet. Now this. We’d hardly been within six feet of each other for years and now all this in one day… I felt dizzy. It ain’t like Rick could have predicted these things would happen. He sure as shit couldn’t command a hoard to force us into each other in a tiny closet… but he must have been hopin’ for somethin’ by sendin’ us out here. Was it gonna work on her? I fuckin’ doubt it.
As we stepped along the edge of the edge of the platform, she held her breath. She always seemed like nothing in this fucked up world scared her anymore, nothing phased her. Half the time it almost seemed like she didn’t give a shit if she died. But this? Heights? This still scared her on some level she couldn't reason away.
But we made it across just fine. She was gripping onto me so tightly I thought she might have bruised the bones in my damn hand. And as we climbed down the next set of stairs, long past the danger, she was still holding onto me. But just as quickly as I realized it, she slipped her hand out and stiffened next to me again, fixing her eyes away toward the railing, which she grabbed onto again desperately.
We made it down the ladder, dropping onto the concrete and making a run back to my bike, slippin' from cover to cover, packs heavy and weighing us down. I was thinking how batshit crazy it was that we’d just done a hospital run and hadn’t had to kill a single walker AND managed to get all the damn supplies... when we rounded the last corner and a string of curses left her mouth.
“You’ve gotta be fucking kidding me. What the fuck?!” She knelt down next to my bike and as I looked, my stomach dropped.
“Son of a fuckin' bitch.” Both tires on my motorcycle were slashed. Ruined. Fuck.
We were stranded in the city without a runnin’ vehicle and somebody knew we were here.
500 notes · View notes
v-hope · 4 years ago
Text
Sweet Night
Pairing: Artist!Taehyung x Heiress!Reader, Heir!OC x Reader
Genre: Fluff (yes, only fluff today, enjoy), Ex Roommates AU, Enemies to Lovers AU, Arranged Marriage (Heir!OC x Reader)
Word Count: 4.8k
Summary: Neither you nor Taehyung were expecting you to show up to his art exhibition, let alone when everyone was already gone, for the two of you were well aware that you didn’t have much of a choice when it came to attending your possible future husband’s charity event instead. Then again, neither of you were counting on your brother and sister in law to take your side and drive you all the way over to him so you could surprise him before the day was over.
A/N: Helloo! This is part 24 of my Social Media AU “Belong”, but you can read it as a stand-alone one shot if you want! I would like to make a shout out to my 🇫🇮 anon for giving me the Jimin idea (you know which one, I changed it a bit to make it fit the story better, but still). I hope you guys enjoy!
Tumblr media
Looking away from the backseat’s window, your eyes focused on your trembling hands instead — the city lights as you passed them by being the only source of light as your brother drove through the streets of Seoul, which for some reason seemed to be extremely long that particular night.
The light music Miyoung had taken upon playing on the radio from the passenger seat, in an attempt to create a somewhat calm atmosphere for you and the nervousness she was sure you were feeling, had yet to make you actually calm down. If anything, you could feel your shaky hands become sweatier by the second as you felt a tingle of anticipation in your chest.
Although you wanted with everything in you to attend Taehyung’s art exhibition, you had got out of bed that morning being mentally prepared to spend the entire day at the Lee’s charity event.
You had been ready to spend most of the day with your parents pretending that everything in your relationship was alright, perfect even. You had been smiling for the cameras all day, greeting people you were sure were just pretending to have the perfect life as well, and being forced to make small talk with the ones who used to be your friends yet had turned their back on you as soon as they had found out you were choosing a more modest life over the luxurious one — the same so called friends of yours that had to keep quiet about your little secret if they didn’t want your parents to destroy their family’s business. After all, your family was with no doubt the most powerful one in Korea. And honestly? You couldn’t help but see it now as a curse, after having spent a lifetime believing it was a gift.
Not only that, but you had also spent most of the day next to Sungjin, lovingly posing for the cameras and holding hands, making you wish every single second it was Taehyung instead. You were sure that way it would’ve been more bearable. What you hated the most was the fact that you knew said pictures were being posted right away, meaning Taehyung would see them, and you hated the utter thought of having the man you had feelings for see you acting like a happy couple with someone else — even more after you had to cancel on him to attend an event with the one guy he had asked you not to bring with you to his art exhibition to begin with.
And yet, after having to endure all of that, here you were — a little over an hour after Taehyung’s exhibit was done, being driven over there by your brother and sister in law, while Jimin held him back at the gallery, and you not even knowing what you were supposed to say at all once you saw him. You couldn’t help but wonder if maybe this whole impromptu apparition of yours was a good idea at all. It had been a long day for him, you knew that for sure, and although he had told you earlier that day that he would’ve loved to have you there, maybe by this point he just wanted to go home and get some rest.
You didn’t have much more time to think about that, though, for just as you remained deep in your thoughts, Seokjin pulled up right in front of the address you had given him before. Looking up from your fidgeting hands, you were met by two pairs of eyes already focused on you.
“Do you want us to go with you?” Seokjin asked, hand on his keys, ready to pull them out at your command.
“Um…” you hesitated, leaning closer to the window as your eyes travelled around the rather isolated street in search of any paparazzis, finding yourself to be quite relieved when you saw none of them around. “Maybe just until I find Tae”.
They nodded, exchanging one last look before they made their way out of the car right as you did. Feeling the cold breeze of the night as soon as you closed the door behind you, you couldn’t help but hug yourself, sticking close to Jin and Miyoung as if you were a kid heading to school with her parents after being called by the principal.
Right as you were about to reach the entrance, however, Yoongi made his way out of the building, looking the other way before his eyes fell on all three of you.
“Hey,” he greeted, politely bowing his head, which you didn’t wait to reciprocate. “I came to see if you were anywhere near, Jimin is going crazy trying to come up with more excuses for Taehyung not to leave”.
You chuckled at his comment, imagining just how troubled your friend must have been. After all, and to be fair, you had taken a good while to get there. “Well, I’m here now”.
“That I can see” he sarcastically replied, eyes travelling from you to Seokjin, and then focusing on Miyoung. “Are you all coming in?” his eyes went back to you.
“Is it just the three of you inside?” your brother spoke up before you could nod. As far as he had understood, it should have been only Jimin and Taehyung inside.
“Oh, no” Yoongi denied. “Namjoon-ie is with us, too”.
“Namjoon?” Miyoung wondered, puzzled eyes going up to your brother. Given her reaction, you couldn’t help but wonder if maybe she knew what the rest of you didn’t when it came to those two.
Seokjin bit the inside of his cheek, giving her a knowing look before his eyes went back to Yoongi. “Actually, I, um… I just remembered Miyoung-ie and I have things to do, so…”
Although your sister in law looked troubled for a split second there, she wasted no time in nodding her head. Looking at Yoongi, she struggled to get the words out of her mouth. “W-We do! So, um…” her eyes focused on you. “We should probably leave. Is it okay?”
“Sure…”
“You’ll be okay?” she pushed it, earning a small laugh from you over his motherly ways.
“She’s in good hands” Yoongi reassured her, receiving a genuine smile from her that only caused his lips to part into one of his own as well.
“Okay” she sweetly replied, giving him a small nod as a sign of gratitude.
Seokjin playfully nudged her, grabbing her hand so the whole marriage thing could at least be a little bit more believable. “Shall we go then?”
“Mhm…” she replied.
“Call me when you’re done here” your brother demanded.
“Oh, I’m sure Taehyung will drive her home” Yoongi’s words got chills running up your spine.
“Okay,” Jin’s eyes travelled from Yoongi to you. “Call me when you’re home then”.
“I will” you obediently complied.
With that said, your brother and sister in law turned around, leaving you alone with Yoongi, who didn’t wait to motion towards the door for you to go inside.
“After you” he politely said.
You smiled, taking in a shaky breath before you took a step in. Suddenly all the nervousness you had felt on your way here came right back to hit you in the face, not knowing at all what to do once you were in front of the guy you had ditched the Lee’s event for — not even knowing how he would react at all, yet hoping he would be happy to have you there.
You didn’t get too much time to mentally prepare, for as soon as you entered the place being followed by Yoongi, you caught a glimpse of the backs of the other three men inside as they faced one of the many paintings that brought some life to the neutral white covering every single wall of the gallery. And it was a matter of you taking a few steps towards them for three pairs of eyes to be set on you. However, yours were only focused on one particular pair of them — those chocolate ones that displayed a mixture of surprise and pure happiness in them.
“You’re here?” Taehyung asked the obvious once you reached their side, causing his friends to chuckle in amusement.
“Seems like it…” you nervously managed to get out.
Silence took over as big smiles were plastered all over your faces — on yours and Taehyung’s, as the two of you were happy as hell to see each other, and on his friends, for they were having a blast watching the two of you awkwardly stand in front of one another with those dumb smiles of yours, not knowing what to do next.
“Come on,” Jimin chimed in, placing his hand behind your back and lightly pushing you towards Tae. “Your girl fooled her parents into coming here, the least she deserves is a hug”.
With a giggle escaping Tae’s mouth, he didn’t hesitate to wrap his arms around you when your body was about to collide with his. Feeling your heart going wild at the warmness of his touch, you wrapped your arms around his waist as well, resting your face on his chest and taking in his scent right as he lowered his head just enough to bury it in your neck.
“Thank you for coming” he mumbled.
A light chuckle abandoned your mouth, deciding to say nothing and instead just nod your head and wrap your arms tighter around his figure.
“Okay, I think this is our cue to go” Namjoon’s voice broke the comfortable silence you had fallen into.
“Yup” Yoongi agreed, patting Jimin’s back to catch his attention, as he was shamelessly taking pictures of the two of you to remember the moment his friends somewhat got together. “Let’s give the love birds some privacy”.
Nodding his head, Jimin shoved his phone back into his pocket — neither of them bothering to say goodbye not to kill the moment the two of you were sharing, and just quietly leaving the gallery instead.
Once you heard the front doors being closed, Taehyung pulled away, cupping your face in his warm hands and smiling at the sight of you. “I never thought seeing you would make me this happy”.
“Yah, Kim Taehyung” you called him out. “I’m sure you can be sweeter than that”.
He chuckled, rolling his eyes at how spoiled you had become when it came to him and his show of affection. “I’m happy you’re here, princess”.
You smiled, resting your hands over his and drawing small circles with your thumbs on his skin. “I’m happy I’m here”.
His smile turned sweeter somehow, lightly pressing his forehead on yours before a chuckle escaped his mouth and he amusedly shook his head.
“What is it?” you wondered.
“Nothing,” he laughed, pulling away and letting go of your face. “It just makes sense now why the guys were trying so hard to keep me here. Specially Jimin”.
“Was he losing it?” you laughed.
“Totally” he nodded. “He made me go over the whole exhibition again and explain each one of my paintings at least twice to him” his eyes travelled to one particular spot on the wall right next to the painting they had been admiring when you walked in. “When he ran out of pieces to ask me about he pointed at this small crack on the wall and asked me how I had come up with such a deep concept”.
This time, you couldn’t help but tilt your head back as a throaty laugh escaped your mouth — one that had Taehyung giggling, absolutely loving the sound of your laugh.
“He’s an idiot” you stated. “But he kept you here for me, so…”
“That he did” he smiled, biting his bottom lip as his eyes unconsciously travelled down your body — that pink dress of yours sure did look even better in person. “Aren’t you cold?”
Your eyes instinctively went down to your uncovered legs and then to your uncovered arms, remembering how you had hugged yourself outside minutes ago because of the cold air of the night. “It’s alright in here”.
He nodded his head. “My coat is by the entrance, in case you get too cold”.
You smiled sweetly, yet it didn’t wait to turn into what seemed more like a teasing smirk. “So you told me earlier today that you wished you had got to see me in this dress and now you want to cover it up?”
Taehyung rolled his eyes in amusement. “Don’t get me wrong, princess. I already told you I think you look beautiful and am most definitely enjoying the view right now” his bold words brought heat to your face. “I’m just looking after you”.
“How sweet of you” your sarcastic tone didn’t really match your flustered expression. “I’m okay for now. Will let you enjoy the view for a little longer”.
“How considerate of you” he was quick to follow your sarcastic antics, silently enjoying that particular choice of yours.
“I know, no need to say it” you playfully squinted your eyes at him, later taking a look at the whole gallery. “You think you could show me around?”
He nodded, a bright smile already taking over his face. “It will be my pleasure” his dramatism got a playful roll of eyes from you. “Where would you like to start?”
“This one is alright” you pointed out, moving closer to the painting you already had in front. “So,” you began, eyes tauntingly going to the crack next to his painting. “Tell me about how you came up with such a deep concept”.
“Shut up” he amusedly rolled his eyes.
“No, but seriously now” you smiled, this time staring at the piece of art in front of you. “Tell me about this one”.
Taehyung’s art, you had found out quite a while ago, tended to be on the abstract side. Therefore, it was even harder for you —or anyone for that matter— to interpret.
This one piece, just like the tag placed above it on the wall let you know, was called ‘Winter Bear’. You could clearly see the winter, the palette of colours he had used just screamed cold days and melancholy. Nevertheless, the bear mentioned in the title was nowhere to be found in the painting — instead, you managed to tell apart what you thought was a little boy, somewhat hidden in between all the colourful strokes surrounding his figure.
“That’s me” he pointed out when he could no longer deal with the confusion in your face, managing to draw your attention back to him.
“What?” your bottom lip stuck out in a pout. “What is the word ‘bear’ doing in the title then?”
He chuckled. “It’s art, you dork. You can name it anything you want”.
“I think it must mean something, though…”
Taehyung bit his bottom lip. Of course you would know better.
“That’s what my grandparents used to call me” he confessed.
You nodded quietly, understandingly — not really knowing what to say yet not wanting to stay silent. “You must miss them so much…”
“Sometimes,” he nodded. “I mean, not a day goes by in which I don’t miss them, it’s just that… it’s been years so… you kinda grow used to it” his shoulders moved up and down, in a shrug that tried not to make it seem like a big deal. “The whole exhibit was related to winter, so it naturally reminded me of them and how they used to call me, and… I guess I got too personal with this exhibition”.
You gave him a sweet smile of reassurance, reaching for his hand and holding it in yours. “It’s your art. It’s supposed to be personal”.
The boxy smile that he gave you right then was all it took for your heart to skip a beat, later taking in a shaky breath when he intertwined his long fingers with yours and his thumb drew small circles on the back of your hand.
Your eyes went back to the painting in front, trying your best not to let him know what his touch did to you. “I love it” you stated, much to his pleasure. “Love the way it seems to make no sense when you only read the title, yet it makes complete sense after you explain it”.
He smiled wholeheartedly. “I think it just makes no sense” his words had you furrowing your eyebrows in confusion. “Not everyone is lucky enough to know the true meaning behind it”.
You giggled. “Lucky me then”.
“Lucky you” he agreed.
Tugging at his hand, you moved on to the next painting, and then the next one, and so on. Not a second had gone by in which you had let go of each other’s hand as you commented on the different paintings and the meanings behind each of them — the two of you finding yourselves having the time of your lives as you gave him your take on them and he confirmed whether or not it was what he had tried to portray.
That was what each of you liked about art so much, the fact that there was no wrong answer and you could discuss it so freely. Sure, he had something in mind the moment he painted each one of his pieces, but it was always fun to see what the rest of the people would feel when they looked at them.
And, for some reason, it was particularly enjoyable to him when it came to discussing art with you. So he had found out back when he invited you to one of his friend’s exhibits. It was different than talking about it with his friends, and he didn’t know if it was the fact that, unlike them, you actually knew about art, or just the fact that it was you.
Maybe both.
Tightening your hold on his hand when there were only four more artworks left, you moved on to the next one, having your jaw drop at the sight of it.
“Hey, this is the one I fixed” you blurted out in both surprise and excitement, unconsciously moving closer to it and dragging Taehyung with you so you could appreciate it better.
Although you were excited to see it there, you couldn’t help but feel your face heat up at the memories it brought back — the fact that you had collided with it and spilled coffee on it, still being both upsetting and embarrassing as hell.
You remembered quite well the way you had ran out in search of an art shop to find the necessary supplies to fix it before Taehyung could get home. Maybe you should have been faster. Not like that would’ve been of too much help, though, for whether you wanted to admit it to yourself or not, you knew very well he would’ve noticed something was off with his newest creation right away.
Looking at the different shades of blue and touches of yellow right then brought you back to that night you pulled an all-nighter, meticulously trying to recreate his painting — the hardest part being that you had only got to see it for a split second before the coffee that used to be on your —by then— broken mug had ruined it. You could only be thankful that it had been just a particular part of the painting and not all of it.
Staring into the picture, you had to stop yourself from reaching your hand out to it and trace your fingers over the pair of eyes you could tell apart in yet another one of his abstract works. You had not truly paid attention to them that one night you spent in Taehyung’s living room fixing his painting, for you had been way too invested in the details you had ruined. And you couldn’t help but feel relieved over the fact that the hot liquid had not touched the eyes he had so perfectly portrayed, for although they looked quite familiar somehow, you weren’t sure you would have been able to do any justice to them.
“I didn’t think you were actually displaying it” you mumbled after a few seconds, eyes still fixed on the painting.
“Why wouldn’t I?” he cocked one of his eyebrows. “Not to be that guy, but it’s quite good”.
“Yes,” you agreed in a heartbeat. “But you can tell one part of it is quite different to the rest of it”.
“You did a good job fixing it, princess” he recognized. “No one could really tell the difference”.
“I can tell” you mumbled.
Taehyung laughed under his breath. “Will you just look up to its title?”
Doing as told out of curiosity, your eyes darted up in a heartbeat — feeling them well up with tears when you read what the label above the artwork said.
“Sweet Night”, ft. Ariel.
Looking up to hold back the tears you felt so dumb for even having in the first place, you shook your head as the corners of your lips curved slightly up. “You did not just credit me after being the one to ruin it to begin with”.
“Hey, I wasn’t taking full credit over something I didn’t completely paint” he stated. “Plus, it’s smart, don’t you think? No one will ever know this Ariel person is no other than the infamous Kim Y/N”.
“You really didn’t have to…”
“I wanted to” he stated.
You bit your bottom lip, no longer being able to hold back your smile and letting it part your lips like it had been threatening to. Taehyung couldn’t help but laugh under his breath over how adorable he thought you were, not even dreaming of stopping himself when he let go of your hand and placed his arm over your shoulders instead, pulling you closer to him as the two of you stared into the artwork in front.
“Why ‘Sweet Night’?” you wondered, leaning your head on his body.
He shrugged. “It’s silly”.
“Come onnn,” you pouted, pulling slightly away so you could look at him. “Out of all the paintings here, you can’t leave out the explanation to this particular one”.
Taehyung sighed, knowing well enough that, one, you were right, and, two, you were not letting this go until he told you.
“It was inspired by that one night I came home to you and Sungjin” he said rather bitterly, remembering pretty well how he had not been fazed at all by the fact that you and said guy had obviously been making out right before, yet feeling his blood boil at the mere thought of it now. “We stayed up late eating lots and lots of sweet popcorn because I had way too many of them and you became addicted to them and how well they went with wine” a small laugh escaped his mouth at the memory. “So I just went with that. Plus, you were being really sweet that night and it was the first time I got to see that side of you, so…”
“That is really sweet” you mumbled, feeling the heat reach your cheeks.
“Don’t” he pleaded.
You laughed. “It truly is sweet, Vante” the way your eyes had softened at the sight of him, had his heart skipping a beat. “What do the eyes mean, though?”
“You just want to torture me by now” he called you out.
“I’m just asking!” you defended yourself with a giggle.
Taehyung rolled his eyes, feeling the heat reach his face as he intently focused on the painting, evading your eyes as he spoke.
“I’ve never been a fan of people having their full attention on me, I don’t like being the center of attention… I mean, I told you today how I was not looking forward to the moment I would have to give a speech in front of all my guests” you nodded, remembering how you had tried to cheer him up when it came to that. “So I don’t really talk about my art… or about art in general, to anyone. I just show it to them and let them interpret it, that’s what art is about, after all. But that one night you asked me a lot about my art and I actually felt like talking about it with you, and I remember the way your eyes were fixed on me almost as if you were scared you would miss some kind of important detail,” he laughed lightly. “And for the first time I liked the attention. I guess that inspired me enough to paint this”.
“So those are my eyes?” you asked.
He shrugged. “It’s up for interpretation”.
You shook your head in amusement, staring down as you felt your face burning. “You’re the worst”.
Taehyung chuckled, pulling you closer to him with the arm that was still around your shoulders, and using his free hand to place two fingers under your chin and make you look up at him. “Am I now?”
You felt your breathing become heavier the second his nose faintly bumped on yours — his lips only centimeters away from your anticipating ones. Too intimidated by him right then, knowing well enough he had you wrapped around his finger, you managed to shake your head no to answer his question, without taking your eyes away from his for even a second. Or well, that until his chocolate ones travelled down to your mouth.
Staring down into his tempting lips as they slowly came closer to yours, you looked up to his eyes for a split second, just enough to catch a glimpse of the way his remained fixed on your mouth. And then, you saw nothing — eyes instinctively closing when his lips softly trapped your bottom one.
Just one touch of his lips made you wonder how you had managed to go on all these weeks without getting a taste of them again.
“I thought you didn’t do this whole ‘friends with benefits’ thing?” you whispered against his lips, opening your eyes to find his dark ones already fixed on you.
A small, breathy laugh escaped his mouth, leaning in so it would faintly brush against yours. “I’m not kissing you as a friend”.
Your lips parted into a smile, not letting another second go by before you pressed your lips to his, making him smile and cup your face in his hands just like he had done weeks ago with the intention of deepening the kiss.
With your arms wrapping around his neck, you pulled him closer to your body, letting go of the kiss for a second to catch your breath and having him take advantage of your slightly open mouth to trap your bottom lip in his eager ones again, this time tracing his tongue over it and slipping it inside your still open mouth — meeting your awaiting one in the middle just the way he wanted.
Letting go of your face, one of his hands travelled down to your lower back so he could feel you even closer, fingers tracing their way down your bare arms as he did so, and feeling goosebumps form on your skin.
“You’re cold?” he asked, taking one second to catch his breath before his wet lips were back on yours.
You shook your head no, a small, shy laugh escaping your mouth. “I didn’t get chills because I’m cold”.
Taehyung bit his lip, feeling the corners of his mouth curving up and pressing one last kiss to your lips before finally pulling away from you as his eyes were intently fixed on yours.
“I will keep my coat to myself then” he teased you.
“Nope,” you were quick to deny. “I am taking you up on the coat offer when we leave”.
“Okay” he laughed lightly, the hand that was still on your face travelling down your arm to intertwine his fingers with yours. “Shall we go?”
You shook your head no quite effusively. “We’re not done with the exhibit yet!”
“I’m hungry, let’s go eat something” Taehyung whined. “We can come back some other day”.
“Yah,” you called him out. “I came all the way here just to see your artworks”.
Your words earned a somewhat bitter pout from him. “Thought you had come all the way over here to see me”.
You couldn’t help but let out a chuckle at that, tugging on his hand to pull him closer, and then making him replace said pout with a smile when you pressed two chaste kisses to his mouth. “It was implicit” your teasing words had him rolling his eyes. “We only have three more to go and then I’m all yours”.
He smirked, pulling you with him to the next piece. “I like the sound of that”.
“I meant it as in, then we can go get some food” you mumbled, feeling your face burning for what felt like the millionth time that night.
“I know” he pecked your lips. “Doesn’t change that I enjoy the sound of that”.
1K notes · View notes
newronantic · 3 years ago
Text
HAIKYUU!! FICS
so this is mostly gonna be for myself to keep track of my favorite fics i’ve read, but hey if anyone else wants to check some of these out then thats great
MHA one is up!!
ill keep updating this as i read more, feel free to send me suggestions!
KageHina
plain as day - emleewrites
In which Hinata has spent the better part of the last twenty years putting his heart and soul into volleyball, hoping to be recognised, to be noticed. And yet he spends all these years also thinking of himself as rather plain, beyond his lack of height and bright hair, and not really noticeable at all.
In Transit - Mysecretfanmoments
Hinata finds that he likes standing close to Kageyama on buses and trains. It doesn't mean anything--probably. Maybe.
I like the way your clothes smell - Mysecretfanmoments
Power outages, ghost stories, and the presence of a certain orange-haired boy lead to bad decision-making on Tobio's part. He'd planned to keep his crush a secret; the universe has other plans.
Chaotic Neutral - akaraka
Who's this Kageyama person on twitter and is he gay?
1: Anonymous: see title
2: Anonymous: curry king
3: Anonymous >> 1: It's the curry king, obviously. Have you been using his memes this whole time without knowing who he was?
4: Anonymous: 1) Hinata Shouyou's boyfriend 2) See above
jellyfish - mysterytwin
At the beginning of his last year at Karasuno High School, Hinata Shouyou starts a list and calls it THINGS TO DO BEFORE GRADUATION, all with high hopes that he’ll be able to complete it before his time runs out.
TsukkiYama
Try This On For Size - CloudMonsta
A lot changed for Yamaguchi Tadashi over the course of high school. He started trying on dresses, for one.
The Great Yamaguchi-Tsukishima Split (Capitalization Necessary) - WyYeuw
"But no, the current situation isn’t normal. This situation requires the full attention of the team.
No, what’s really concerning this time around, is that Yamaguchi is the one ignoring Tsukishima.”
Yamaguchi confesses. Tsukishima fucks up—like, really fucks up. The volleyball club notices and loses a week’s worth of practice.
IwaOi
Terrarium - sausaged
He's practically a professional at being proactive (lies, lies, and lies when it comes to Iwaizumi).
At this point, is he really happy with just staying best friends forever? Will he be writing journals and collecting rocks forever (he will, he knows, but that is aside from the point)?
Can he really tag his Instagram photos with #YOLO if he doesn't actually put that phrase into practice?
A story about Oikawa Tooru, Iwaizumi Hajime, plants, and rocks.
They Say it Rain Diamonds on Jupiter - exsao
"You're in love with him."
Hajime considers denying it. He considers deliberately choking on his drink to express surprise, to create a distraction by spitting onto the man in front of him's pristine white shirt and causing a commotion. Instead, he swallows his mouthful of soda and heaves a small sigh once his mouth is free.
"Yeah," he says instead.
He's never been good at lying, anyway.
bait and switch - Stylographic_Blue_Rhapsody
Oikawa's university volleyball team knows he's in a long-distance relationship with someone from high school. They imagine a sweet-faced girl that matches his sarcasm with patience. They are so incredibly wrong.
my heart is where it’s always been - foreverautumn
Iwaizumi places his phone down carefully.
Oikawa. Pining after someone. There’s no way.
(Iwaizumi knows he shouldn’t care who Oikawa might have feelings for, but within the span of three days, it’s somehow the only thing he can think about.)
KuroKen
Beautiful People Will Ruin Your Life - todxrxki
Kuroo Tetsurou runs a private Twitter account where he's constantly tweeting about how desperately in love he is with Kozume Kenma. Little does he know that Kenma sees all the tweets and keeps referencing the account in an attempt to get Kuroo to confess to him. / Or, five times Kuroo didn't notice Kenma hinting about his private Twitter account, and one time he finally did.
the things that get caught in the valves of his heart - ghostpot
Emotional competency is not exactly Kuroo's strong suit. Kenma finds it quite amusing.
Accidentally In Love - todxrxki
Kuroo frowns, but then slowly, the corners of his mouth lift up into a smirk. "Well, if it's so unbelievable, why don't we give it a try?"
Kenma glances up at him curiously. "What do you mean?"
"Let's do the 36 questions to fall in love," Kuroo says, still smirking stupidly. "If we don't fall in love, then you're right, it's bullshit. But if we do somehow..." Kuroo waggles his eyebrows. "Then I win." / Kuroo decides he and Kenma should do the 36 questions to fall in love as a joke, but they both start to realize they might actually be in love already.
the galaxy is endless (i thought we were, too) - cosmogony
TW: major character death
Kuroken AU where the last words your soulmate will say to you appear on your skin when you turn 16, and how Kenma and Kuroo learn what this means over the course of their lives
even if you’re ahead for a bit, i will catch up - ghostpot
Kuroo first confesses when they're sticky-fingered, wide-eyed kids, and subsequently every day after that. Kenma takes a while to come around.
you’re the brake lines failing (as my car swerves off the freeway) - ghostpot
Kenma thinks that Kuroo looks ugly with his head bent against the arm of the couch like that. Then Kenma thinks that he wants to marry him, and is promptly thrown into the 5 stages of grief.
teach me the way home - icespyders
“Don’t go far off, not even for a day, because —
because — I don’t know how to say it: a day is long
and I will be waiting for you, as in an empty station
when the trains are parked off somewhere else, asleep.”
Kuroo and Kenma grow up in transit.
in this universe - crossbelladonna
Living with Kuroo is sometimes, just like this. It always feels surreal like he's living half a world and a lot of things rush by too quickly. Kenma feels like he'd watched him come and go in a blink, eyes wide and wordless as the shared space went snug in an instant and far larger in the next.
All this, and a glass of water.
Beginning’s End - todxrxki
Somehow over the course of Kenma's lifetime, he’s never really had an opportunity to miss Kuroo. He’s always been there. Even when they went to different schools, Kuroo would meet him afterwards so they could walk home together, shoulders brushing, Kuroo occasionally taking the opportunity to guide him when his nose was buried in the newest video game. The thought of Kuroo not being there anymore is uncomfortable, to say the least. / Kozume Kenma's third year and the changes the year brings in himself and his relationship with Kuroo Tetsurou.
All I Want for Christmas is You - todxrxki
“Kuro,” he says. “You’re a single guy.”
“Yeah, great, thanks for pointing that out.”
“And my parents already know you, plus they already know you like guys or whatever so… what if you pretended to be my date for Christmas dinner?” / In which Kenma recruits his housemate and best friend Kuroo to be his fake date for Christmas.
BokuAka
just to miss the sun - rosevtea
Everything begins to implode when MSBY Jackals outside hitter Bokuto Koutarou crashes Akaashi's livestream.
Operation BokuAka - kazzydolyn
After spending two whole years watching Bokuto and Akaashi pine for one another, the rest of the Fukuroudani Volleyball Club has had enough. When everyone meets up for a reunion dinner, the team decides to play matchmaker and finally get the two of them together. Unfortunately, their plan starts to fall apart when they discover that Akaashi is already dating someone. And apparently so is Bokuto. What a strange coincidence.
bitter - silvercistern
He accepted his classmate's chocolates gracefully, then declared his lack of interest with as much dignity as he could muster. She deserved the courtesy. At least she'd acknowledged that Valentine's Day was all about her, and not about him in the slightest.
Because if any of these girls had taken the time to actually get to know him, they’d quickly realize something even more important than his lack of interest in girls.
And that was that Akaashi hated sweets.
In Another Life - LittleLuxray
TW: major character death
Sleeping didn't come as easy as it used to. Bokuto knew this, and now Akaashi did, too.
The hospital AU that no body asked for, but that I took upon myself to write.
120% yes - pissedofsandwich
TOKYO FRANCHISE COMING SOON @OnigiriMiya
in reply to @bokkun_official 
Congratulations! In celebration of your historic engagement, please DM us so we can send you a free membership code with a 25% discount on every fourth purchase!
Kissing Ace - karasunovolleygays
It happens right after training camp.
Akaashi Keiji has a secret he has guarded since he was a child. He won’t go so far as to call it a fear, but more of an aspect of himself of which he is horribly mortified. No one on the team knows about it, and Akaashi does his best to keep it that way.
But years of dodging hugs and casual contact come to naught in the blink of an eye and the swipe of a hand.
daisy rings and frivolous things (i am deliriously in love with you) - gabstar
Akaashi Keiji is in love. Bokuto Koutarou is a star. Everyone on Fukurodani has a gambling problem.
SakuAtsu
The MSBY Black Jackals Read Thirst Tweets - isaksara (syailendra)
Sakusa’s eyes are very dark naturally, sucking in all surrounding rays of light and crushing them in his pupils. For an athlete, he is rather pale. His lips look very pink in comparison. Atsumu is suddenly catastrophically aware that in this instance, ‘accent’ is a euphemism. “Good enough for your Olympic-size ego, Miya?”
(In which Atsumu realizes that he is attracted to Sakusa Kiyoomi in the most inconvenient way possible.)
A Liar’s Truth - internetpistol
In which Sakusa Kiyoomi is raised to believe that gay people go to hell but then takes one look at Miya Atsumu and thinks, then why the hell did God make them so fucking hot?
769 notes · View notes
mint-yooxgi · 4 years ago
Text
Gilded Gold - Yandere!Vampire Prince!Jaehyun X Reader
Tumblr media
Yandere AU, Vampire AU, & Prince AU
Genre: Mature, Horror, Angst, Smut (Someone goes a little feral at the end there)
Pairing: Jaehyun X Reader
Words: 22,845
Warnings: Jaehyun is pretty sadistic and manipulative in this one, as such there is a lot of violence and gore mentioned. This is a Yandere story, it will contain themes such as stalking, violence, obsession, possessive natures, and just general overall creepiness and swearing. You have been warned.
A/n: It’s finally here! Omg, after months (again) of nothing, I'm really happy with the length of this one and how it turned out. Certain scenes are really good in my opinion, so hopefully you enjoy reading them just as much as I enjoyed writing them. I’ve nearly had this idea planned out for almost a year, so I'm happy that I've finally finished writing it all out. Tbh, certain scenes are pretty self indulgent... Anyways, I do really hope you enjoy this one, please do let me know what you think! Feedback is always appreciated!
“Is everything prepped and ready for tomorrow?” He asks, expression stern as he looks towards his adviser. 
“Yes, my Prince,” with a nod from the adviser, a smirk begins to slowly spread itself across Jaehyun’s lips.
“Perfect,” a dark look takes over his features, smirk now fully formed as he thinks over his plan once more.
Tomorrow will change everything, and he can hardly wait. For too long he’s waited, watching in the shadows until this day would come. Until finally, he can have everything that he’s ever wanted. Tomorrow, he’ll finally have you.
From the first moment he saw you all those months ago, he knew he had to have you. The way you so willingly went out of your way to help your neighbours with their little market stand only confirmed to Jaehyun that you’re a kindhearted individual. However, if it weren’t for the way you cussed out an older man for attempting to hit on your younger sister, he would have assumed you to be too soft. That is what intrigued him: that you could look so innocent on the outside, but on the inside, contain a strong, level-head, is what drew him to you.
Since then, he’s been sneaking out of the castle at least five times a week to find you, and once he did, he couldn’t stop himself from simply observing you. He became another shadow in the night, and you were none the wiser as to the monster lurking just outside of your window.
The day he learnt that you had no potential suitors, he swears he had never been happier in all his long years of living. It took him a bit of persuading, but he eventually convinced his mother to let himself actively pursue you. She was a bit wary at first, having never met you, nor even having heard of you before. The fact that you’re a mere human, and a commoner, no less, concerned her greatly. However, he made sure to take care of everything before your arrival. After all, you’re his responsibility now, and he’ll make sure to take care of you in any and every way that he can. 
Soon, the whole kingdom will know that you are meant to be his, the Crown Prince’s very own betrothed. The announcement might turn some heads, considering everyone is aware of the vampire society, and how the creatures of the night reign over them, but he’s counting on the support from those whom support interspecies relationships. It will be a huge step in a positive direction for his family to bring a common human into their inner circle. Not that you would have a choice, whether you know it or not.
That night, he barely gets any rest, too excited for what is to come tomorrow. He has it all planned out, the outfit he’s going to wear, how he’s going to make a grand entrance when meeting you for the first time, as well as the first thing he’s going to say to you once he sees you. 
His eyes flash red. Fuck, he finally gets to see you in person with you actually aware of his presence this time. Oh, how he can hardly wait to see your reaction when you gaze upon him for the first time. A smirk slowly tugs at his lips as he envisions the scene in his head, your awestruck face, the wonder shining in your eyes, and the way you’ll bite your lip as you take him in with the realization that he’s all yours.
Tomorrow cannot come fast enough.
That next morning you are awoken by the sound of your mother answering the front door. Muffled voices reach your ears as you bury yourself deeper into the warmth of your comforter. The sound of your door creaking has your eyes flinging open as your mother storms into your room.
“Get up! There’s a royal advisor at our front door asking for you, personally,” she tears your blankets off of you before moving over to your dresser to pull out some of your nicest clothes. “Apparently he has a message from the Prince. For you.”
“For me?” Your head is reeling at the thought of a royal advisor visiting you with a personal message from the Prince himself. What would the Prince want with you? You have no idea.
“Yes, you,” your mother tuts at your confused look as you clamber out of bed. “Now hurry up and get dressed. Don’t keep him waiting.”
Without another word, your mother leaves your room, heading back downstairs so as not to keep the advisor alone for too long. She would have made your sister keep him company, but she had to go to work this morning.
Squinting at your now closed door, you shift your gaze over to the outfit she has so meticulously picked out for you to wear. The clothes are quite literally the nicest ones you own, and your frown deepens. What message could possibly warrant you wearing your nicest clothes?
Yawning, you rub at the sleep still in your eyes. Screw formalities, it’s just a message, it can’t be that serious. Forgoing the outfit, you quickly head to the bathroom to freshen up and at least make yourself look presentable. No matter what this message turns out to be, you’re going to hop right back into bed afterwards anyways, so you see no point in getting dressed.
Making your way downstairs, you hear soft chatter coming from the front room, and as soon as you enter you can feel your mother’s scrutinizing gaze on you for not changing. You briefly make eye contact with her before turning your attention to the unfamiliar man standing across from her. You can already tell from his proper stature and from the royal emblem hanging proudly on the left side of his uniform that he’s the advisor.
“Ah, good, you must be Miss (Y/n), it’s a pleasure to meet you,” he bows to you. “My name is Minho, and I come bearing a message from Prince Jaehyun himself.”
You bow back respectfully, nodding for him to continue as your mother smiles almost nervously from the side of the room.
“You are to be moved to the castle immediately,” he says as your eyes go wide. “You are to be betrothed to Prince Jaehyun effective immediately.”
“Excuse me?” Your jaw has dropped, disbelief clear on your face.
“You are to be moved-“
“No, no, I heard you,” you cut him off, “I meant, what the actual fuck?”
“(Y/n)!” Your mother scolds.
“What? You’re telling me that this completely unprompted visit is to tell me I am to become the prince’s fiancée without any say in the matter?” You ask, incredulously.
“I apologize, I should have been clearer,” Minho clears his throat. “You do get a choice, as it is the Prince’s intention to court you first. However, in doing so, it requires you to come stay at the palace for the time being.”
“I-“ your mouth gapes like a fish out of water, “do I have a choice in this?”
“Of course!” Minho immediately responds. “I understand this is very sudden, and probably very confusing, but the Prince promised to explain everything once you have arrived to the palace for the day. We really shouldn’t keep him waiting too long.”
“I-“ you’re about to object once more when your mother cuts you off.
“Go with him, sweetie,” you frown at the look she’s giving you. You don’t think you’ve ever heard her voice sound so tense, completely different to how she looked when she first entered your room not ten minutes ago. “He told me you would have to leave immediately, so I’ll send a few bags with your stuff later this week.”
“But mom-“
“No buts,” she smiles, but it doesn’t quite reach her eyes. “This is a once in a lifetime opportunity, and the Prince chose you, no less. Please be on your best behaviour.”
“Great, then it’s settled!” Minho smiles, beginning to exit the room in order to walk towards the front door. He places a hand at the small of your back and guides you along with him, with you too stunned to say much else. “Thank you for your hospitality,” he bows to your mother once at the door, “we’ll be in touch.”
With those words, he is leading you out of the front and to the car that awaits at the end of the driveway. By now, a few of your neighbours have stepped outside their homes to view what is going on, and you can see them whispering to themselves as you are ushered into the back seat. You only wish you got to say goodbye to your sister before you had to leave.
“Guess leaving is so urgent that I can’t change out of my pyjamas, huh?” You joke, a hint of seriousness to your tone as you cross your arms. 
Minho soon slides into the front seat beside the driver whom has been waiting in the car this whole time.
“I’m afraid not, Miss,” he replies, pulling out his phone. “We’re on a tight schedule today.”
You sigh, leaning your head on your hand as you look out of the window. You see more neighbours watching the car go down the road as you drive off, and you begin to wonder how you even got into this mess. Though you will admit, a part of you is intrigued. To catch the eye of the Prince, the Vampire Prince, no less, is causing your heart to race. 
You’ve seen a few photos of the Prince before in passing, and he does look very handsome, so a part of you is curious to see if that’s actually true. Another part of you feels excitement at the thought of being sought after by the prince himself. Maybe that’s why you’re not putting up more of a fuss at this matter. A sigh escapes your lips at the thought, and you begin to wonder what exactly is in store for you once you arrive at the castle.
About forty-five minutes later, you arrive at the palace. Your breath is quite literally stolen away as you gaze upon the fortress in awe, taking in the arches and crevices in the architecture, along with its massive size.
“If you think the outside is grand, just wait until you see the inside,” Minho chuckles, noting your gaze of wonderment.
His words manage to pull you out of your admiration of the palace and back to the steps in front of you which lead up to the front doors. Shaking your head slightly, you clear your thoughts. You’re sure you’ll have plenty of time to admire and explore the castle once you get settled inside.
“So, uh…“ you trail off, following Minho up the steps, not knowing what to ask first.
“I’ll be leading you to your personal chambers while you’re going to be staying here, then some servants will be coming to prepare you for lunch with the Prince,” Minho explains, and you nod along absentmindedly, still too distracted by the grand stonework of the building, of which is much more intricate on the inside. “I’m sure His Royal Highness would gladly take you on a tour of the premisses, given how intrigued you seem to be by the grounds already.”
At this you can feel your face heat up in slight embarrassment, “sorry.”
“No, no, don’t apologize, Miss,” Minho smiles at you assuringly. “It’s quite nice to see someone admiring the architecture once more.”
“What do you mean?” You tilt your head slightly in curiosity.
“Oh, it’s just been quite a while since we’ve had a new guest who’s admired the detailing as you are,” he says.
“Must not get many new guests then,” you mutter, but he still manages to hear you.
“No, not really,” he sighs, eyes soon going wide as he’s come to realize what he’s just said, clearing his throat in the next moment. “I mean, I’ve said enough already.”
You simply hum in response as he leads you through some side corridors and up another set of stairs. You can feel your legs burning at the amount of flights you’ve climbed, not used to the amount of steps yet. Once you reach the tops of the stairs, you find yourself resting your hands on your knees in order to catch you breath.
“One second,” you hold up a finger, indicating to Minho to stop and let you catch your breath.
“Alright, but we really mustn’t delay, Miss,” he says, worry flashing briefly in his eyes, but it passes so quickly that you do not see it.
After a few moments, you right yourself, taking a deep breath before nodding at him to continue. He nearly breathes a sigh of relief as he continues to lead you down the hallway you’re now in, checking his watch on the way and noticing he’ll make it just in time. It’s important for everything to go according to schedule today, or so the Prince has reminded him countless times, along with the other staff. Everything has to be perfect.
Leading you to a set of doors near the end of the hallway, Minho pushes them both open to reveal a large room full of everything you could possibly think of. You’re pretty sure this room is the size of your entire main floor of your house, complete with a four post king sized bed, privacy screen which looks like it leads to another part of the room, along with various shelves, desks, and cabinets spread throughout. To say you are awestruck would be an understatement.
You take your time wandering around the room, opening one of the side doors to find an adjacent bathroom built for the gods. A large tub rests on one side, along with a set of double sinks, a large mirror that takes up the entire wall, along with a huge shower which you believe also works as a sauna. You are hardly able to believe what you’re seeing, this is all so unbelievable. To think, your lifestyle quite literally has changed in the blink of an eye. 
Now, if only you could see what rests behind the privacy screen. You’ve avoided opening the doors so far due to the fact that you’re unsure what’s waiting for you on the other side. In the back of your mind, you hope it’s not another room. More particularly, that it’s not the Prince’s room.
The whole time that you spend exploring your new room, Jaehyun stands just off to the side beside the privacy screen where you cannot see him. A smirk is ever present on his face. He could smell your scent getting closer with every step you took down the hallway, only serving to make his dead heart race in his chest. He cannot help how his mouth salivates at the thought of you now only being one room away, nothing more than a thin set of doors standing between your bodies. He can hardly wait to meet you.
After a few more moments of you taking in your new room, you turn to look at Minho, “so, uh, am I allowed to see what’s behind those privacy doors,” you motion to them with your head, “or is that part off-limits?”
Your attempt at a joke earns a small chuckle from him, “actually, I believe the Prince should be joining us soon.”
“Is that the Prince’s room?” Your eyes widen as your suspicion is all but confirmed. You know you’re expected to become close with him, but you aren’t expecting to be literally sharing a room.
“Oh, no!” Minho is quick to answer, to which you breathe a small sigh of relief. “I believe His Highness went to inspect the second portion of your room earlier, before your arrival, in order to make sure everything is up to his standards.”
“Ah, I see,” you nod in understanding. “Glad to know he’s taking such precautions for me.”
Of course! He wants nothing but the best for you, after all. It’s what you deserve. Jaehyun’s smirk only grows, and he takes your words as his cue to finally make his presence known, and finally enter the room.
Ever so slowly, you notice a shadow forming behind the semi-transparent screen. You can feel your heart pounding in your chest, racing at the prospect of finally being able to meet the Prince in person. Little do you know, that this is not the first time that the Prince will be seeing you.
Just like a scene from a movie, the doors part, Prince Jaehyun stepping through the threshold. His gaze lingers on the ground briefly before finally looking upwards to lock gazes with you. Your breath hitches, and you can feel your heart skipping a beat, all of which does not go unheard by Jaehyun, only serving to make him more smug during this time. Besides, the smirk resting on his features only adds to his charming good looks as he takes a confident step forwards, slowly making his way over to you.
The whole time, your eyes never leave his. Again, to say you’re stunned would be an understatement. You don’t think you’ve ever seen a finer looking specimen in your entire life, and from the looks of things, he can read your expression like an open book. 
For a brief moment, your gaze rakes over his entire body, and you have to stop yourself from inhaling sharply once more. He’s wearing the finest embroidered suit that you’ve ever seen in your life, the sharp gold thread contrasting with the black fabric. You know the suit must have cost a fortune, just from the design alone, not to mention the materials. The detailing of the floral design, combined with the surrounding leaves is stunning, but what catches your attention the most is the fact that he’s not wearing a shirt beneath the suit jacket. You can see the smooth skin of his chest on display, only serving to make you lick your lips in admiration, anticipation lingering in your chest. For what, you aren’t quite sure, but fuck, you’d be lying to yourself if you didn’t think he was extremely attractive.
His chest swells with pride. He knew you would react like this, only confirming to him that you also find him as attractive as he finds you. Well, considering all the peasants you had to endure back in your hometown, he’s not surprised. As if any of them ever stood a chance with you. Well, not if he had anything to say about it.
So far, everything is going exactly how he has planned it to, and he couldn’t be more happier in this moment. Minho was on time and everything, though Jaehyun worried at one point that you were running behind schedule. He cannot let that happen, everything needs to run like clockwork in order for things to be perfect.
The one thing that he wishes more than anything that he could do right now would be to take you into his arms, but he knows that would be overstepping boundaries at the moment. The last thing he wants to do is scare you off on the first day. After all, since you’re going to be spending eternity together, he doesn’t want to push you away now.
You don’t mean to stare as you have been, but you cannot help it. With wide eyes and slightly parted lips, you continue to stand there, almost dumbfounded by the current events. By now, you are most certainly regretting not listening to your mother to change into your nicest clothes. Meeting the Prince while still in your pyjamas is making you feel a bit self-conscious. How embarrassing, to meet him while you’re still in your sleep clothes.
On the other hand, Jaehyun thinks that it’s so endearing that you’re still dressed in your pyjamas. Were you that excited to meet him that you couldn’t even wait to leave, meaning you forwent changing? How adorable.
“Miss (Y/n), may I formally introduce you to Prince-“
“Jung Jaehyun,” he cuts Minho off, taking your hand into his own in order to bring it to his lips and kiss the back of it tenderly. Oh, how soft your skin feels against his own. “It’s a pleasure to finally meet you.”
Introducing yourself, your voice is a bit airy, still breathless due to everything that you’ve encountered so far. You’re especially impressed with the way he’s held himself, “the pleasure is all mine, Your Highness.”
“Please,” he smiles, running his thumb over the skin on the back of your hand before releasing his hold on you and returning his hands to his sides, “call me Jaehyun.”
You smile back politely, thoughts running through your head a mile a minute. All the while, your nerves begin to grow, and you begin to ponder why exactly it was you that he chose. You don’t necessarily think you’re anything special, but Jaehyun would beg to differ.
“Um, I was told that we were going to be dining soon?” You ask, shifting slightly from foot to foot as you attempt to break the small silence that has settled over the three of you. You figure Minho is probably avoiding saying anything right now out of respect for you and the Prince.
“Ah, yes,” Jaehyun nods once in confirmation. “That is, if you’re willing to join me for lunch. Of course, I’ll let you change first, unless you’d prefer to stay in those.”
At the motion of his head towards your choice in outfit, you can feel your cheeks heating up once more in embarrassment.
“Oh, uh…” you avoid his gaze for the first time today, and he can’t help but be reminded of how cute you are as you add quietly, “I don’t have anything else to wear.”
He simply quirks a brow in response, “has Minho not shown you your wardrobe yet?”
“No, I-“ you smile sheepishly, “I didn’t get a chance to pack any of my own clothes before I left. I mean, I didn’t even have a chance to change.”
He chuckles this time in response, “come with me, Princess.”
You cannot deny the way your heart positively flutters when he calls you that. A fact which only makes him smile subtly. You haven’t even known him for more than fifteen minutes and he already sets your heart racing. A fact which only serves to stroke his ego even further. This is going even better than anything he could have ever planned.
Leading you over to a side door that resides in the second half of your room, of which you notice is a lavish seating area complete with a chaise, he opens it. A grandiose closet is revealed to you, filled with the most lavish pieces of clothing you’ve ever seen in your entire life. Dresses, shirts, skirts, you name it, line the shelves. Rows upon rows of accessories cause your eyes to widen even further than they already have. You cannot help the surprised gasp that escapes your lips as you take it all in.
“Is this-“ you blink, attempting to wrap your head around everything as you try to get the words out, “is this-“
“It’s all for you, Princess,” Jaehyun smiles at your wide eyed expression.
“I-“ you turn to him, “I don’t know what to say.”
“You don’t have to say anything,” he assures you.
“Honestly, I’m torn,” you bite your lip nervously.
He simply quirks a brow at you to continue, despite the fact a frown wants to pull onto his features.
“I’m torn between ‘I can’t accept this’, and ‘thank you so much’,” you admit, and you hear him chuckle once more. Out of the corner of your eyes, you notice Minho tense.
“Always so humble,” he hums. “Don’t worry about it, it’s a gift.”
“I-“ you take a deep breath, “thank you.”
He smiles, putting his hands in the pockets of his pants, “just promise me that you’ll use it.”
You notice how he motions to the closet with his head, and you immediately nod, “of course.”
“Good,” he nods once. “Well, I’ll let you get ready. Maria and Greta should be arriving soon to prepare you for lunch.”
As soon as he finishes speaking, a soft knock sounds at your bedroom door, signifying the arrival of the two aforementioned women. He could hear them walking down the hallway and figured now would be as good a time as ever to take his leave, even if it will be momentarily.
“I’ll see you soon, Princess,” with those words, he walks out of your room. 
The two women whom have been patiently waiting in the hallway to come in now step inside as Minho steps out of the room following Jaehyun. You notice that they look somewhat nervous, approaching you carefully as if you’re someone to be cautious of. You send them a reassuring smile, introducing yourself shortly after.
“It’s nice to finally meet the woman the Prince has been talking non-stop about,” Maria admits, seeming to relax more now that you’ve talked to the two of them.
“Maria,” Greta hisses while elbowing her partner. Your brow furrows, it seems as if they’re not allowed to talk about that in front of you.
“He’s talked about me?” You question as they move you into the closet to pick out an outfit for the day.
“Oh yes,” Maria nods. “He’s been very… excited for you to come visit the palace.”
“I won’t warn you again,” Greta narrows her eyes at Maria disapprovingly.
“Am I not allowed to ask about it then?” You frown.
“Oh, you can ask any and all the questions you’d like,” Greta answers, pulling a simple gown down from the racks. “We’re just not supposed to talk about certain things.”
“Like the Prince?”
“Listen dearie,” Greta sighs. “If you knew what’s best for you, you’d run, and run far.”
Her words only serve to confuse you even more, especially at the nervous expression Maria now wears on her face.
“Is there something I should know?” You ask as they help you into the dress.
“Don’t listen to Greta, dear,” Maria pats your arm gently once the dress is secure. “The Prince is a wonderful gentleman, and from the looks of things, he’s completely smitten with you.”
“But he hardly even knows me,” you mumble as they start to work on your hair.
“He knows you better than you think,” Greta’s voice is barely above a whisper. In fact, it’s so faint, you don’t catch all of what she says.
“Pardon me?” You catch her gaze in the mirror they have you sitting in front of now.
“All the more reason for you to get to know him better,” she corrects herself with a smile, though it doesn’t quite reach her eyes.
Maria manages to change the subject shortly after by asking you questions about yourself, and her telling you small stories about her life. The two of you are able to connect well quickly, and you know that if she continues to look after you while you’re here, you will have a friend in her. Greta, on the other hand, you’re not so sure about.
Not only does she continuously look at you with worry in her eyes, she scolds Maria any time she thinks Maria has overstepped any sort of boundary. The amount of times Maria has begun to tell you about the Prince, only for her to be cut off by Greta soon after is astounding. Hopefully you can get some answers from the Prince himself. After all, you are going to lunch together.
“There, all finished,” Maria smiles warmly at you as she helps you stand up.
“Thank you,” you smile back, smoothing out the front of your gown subconsciously.
“Come now,” Greta says, checking her watch, “or else we’ll be late.”
“Oh dear, we wouldn’t want that,” Maria suddenly looks worried. “We’ll lead you to the dining room. His Highness should already be waiting.”
“I guess I shouldn’t keep him waiting, then,” you joke as you three move to exit the room.
You fail to notice the brief glance the two of them share as Greta says, “no, you really shouldn’t.”
Without another word, you all make your way down the hallway, them leading you to where Jaehyun has instructed them to meet him. As he hears you approaching, a small smile tugs at his lips. He can’t wait to start his forever with you, and today is day one.
“Ready for lunch?” He asks, turning around just as you walk up to him.
You nod, humming your eagerness. You can’t wait to see what they decide to serve to eat, you are in a palace after all. Besides, the company is wonderful so far, and you really want to get to know him better.
Lunch with Jaehyun passes by far too quickly for either of your likings, and before you know it, you’re both finished. To say that you enjoy your time with him would be an understatement. Not only was the food delicious, but you also got to do what you wanted and get to know him better. One thing you know for sure, is that he has a beautiful smile, of which you hope to see more of. Plus, he’s got the cutest dimples you’ve ever seen.
After lunch, he gives you a tour of the castle, and once again, your breath is stolen from your lungs. The whole time you spend admiring the architecture, Jaehyun spends admiring you. His dead heart races in his chest every time he looks over to see that awestruck expression on your face. You’re so beautiful, and the fact that you’re admiring everything he shows you so far, along with how grateful you’ve been towards him, assures him that he’s made the best choice in choosing you as his fiancée.
Every so often, his hand will brush against your own as he walks with you through the castle. You cannot help the rush you feel each time he does this, his touch both innocent and teasing at the same time. Each brush only makes a subtle smirk pull at his own lips, knowing he already has such an effect on you.
All too soon, the afternoon comes to an end and he’s leading you back to your room for the evening. He’s told you that you’ll more than likely be meeting his mother tomorrow, so you should get as much rest as you can, considering how hectic the day has been for you.
“If you ever need me, I’m just down the hallway to your left,” he tells you, of which you find yourself nodding in response. “If an emergency ever arises, come and get me. No matter the time.”
“I’ll keep that in mind,” you say, lips twitching upwards in a half smile. “Thanks.”
“Of course,” he returns your smile. “I’ll always be here for you.”
By now, the two of you have stopped just outside of your bedroom door. You stare deeply into his eyes, and you can see the sincerity reflected in them. Your lips part slightly as you take a small step backwards as he continues to stare intensely at you, almost as if he’s in a daze.
Before you know it, he’s blinking as if to clear his head while clearing his throat, “well, I’ve got a few things to attend to before dinner. I’ll have someone bring you something to eat for then. In the meantime, feel free to do whatever you’d like, just let Maria know where you’ll be.”
“Sounds good,” you smile once more.
“See you later, Princess,” he grins, grabbing your hand in order to place a gentle kiss onto the back of it, successfully making your face warm. Without another word, he takes his leave. 
Watching his figure disappear down the hallway, you let out a blissful sigh. Lunch was enjoyable, and you can’t wait to see what else he has in store for you. Not only that, but you can’t wait to further explore the castle and find your favourite spots. Hopefully you can find a little nook to read some of the books from the massive library that caught your eye while you explored with Jaehyun.
Entering your room, you bite your lip. The only thing you’re particularly nervous about would be meeting his mother. Based off of what he’s told you about her so far, she can be very picky about mannerisms, and it can be difficult for anyone new to impress her. Maybe that’s what Minho meant by no one new has come to the palace for a long time. You just hope you can make a good impression, or at least good enough for her to at least tolerate you. After all, if you’re to marry her son, having her like you would be a huge success.
“You okay there?” Maria’s voice manages to pull you out of your own thoughts.
“Huh? Oh, yeah,” you reply absentmindedly, walking further into the room as the door falls shut. Your brow furrows slightly as you notice Greta isn’t with her this time. “Where’s Greta?”
Maria stiffens ever so slightly, “she has this afternoon and evening off.”
“Ah, makes sense,” you nod, moving to sit on your bed.
“Is there anything I can get for you, Miss?” She asks politely.
“Not at the moment, thank you,” you shoot her a grateful smile. “I think I might just nap, I am a bit sleepy.”
“Alright, well, I’ll help you change,” 
“No need, I can do it myself,”
“No, please, I insist,” she’s already begun to move around your room and grabs a fresh set of clothes for you to change into. “After all, it’s what I’m here for.”
“Well, okay,” you sigh softly, allowing Maria to help you change.
Once done, the two of you just sit together in your room talking about anything and everything. She tells you that her family has always served the Jung’s for as long as she can remember, but she doesn’t mind it here. Apparently, the job pays really well, and they get ample time off.
Before you know it, there is a knock on your door and another servant is there holding a tray for you piled high with plates containing your evening meal. You thank them and move to take the tray from their hands, but they insist on putting it down for you. They set everything up for you on the table in your room before bowing respectively and leaving you to your own with Maria still patiently standing off to the side.
Sitting back down, your eyes rake over the food now resting in front of you. This is one of your favourite meals, but Jaehyun couldn’t possibly know that. Could he?
“The Prince made special preparations for you before you came,” Maria says, noticing your stare.
“This is my favourite dish,” you comment.
“I take it everything is to your liking, then?” She smiles.
“Of course, but I still don’t understand how he knows this is my favourite dish,” you say.
“If I’m not mistaken, I believe he was informed by your mother,”
“He’s talked with my mom?” Your eyes widen slightly in surprise.
“Oh, I mean, Minho was told by your mother, who in turn told Prince Jaehyun when he got back to the palace today,” Maria is quick to correct herself.
“Ah, I see,” you turn back to the food spread out in front of you. “Oh my! Where are my manners? Would you like anything?”
Maria almost looks caught off guard by your offer of sharing your food with her, “oh, no, thank you! I couldn’t.”
“Nonsense,” you shake your head, pushing one of the many side dishes over to her. “I don’t like eating alone, anyways.”
“Are you sure?” Her voice is hesitant, gnawing her bottom lip in worry.
“Of course,” you confirm. “I wouldn’t have asked if I wasn’t.”
“Thank you, Miss,” she graciously accepts the dish, grabbing a set of utensils to join you in eating.
You simply smile at her in response, happy to be sharing your favourite meal with someone else. Her presence brings you comfort in this still unfamiliar place, of which you know will take some getting used to, despite the tour you took today. After all, you are alone, and far from home.
Meanwhile, Jaehyun paces in his study. He sent Minho to gather Greta for him just before you came to meet him downstairs for lunch that day. He overheard what she told you, and to say he was not impressed would be an understatement. Is she trying to make him look bad in front of you? No matter, he’ll dispose of the problem soon enough.
“Minho, I still don’t understand what’s going on-“ Greta’s voice gets caught in her throat once she is escorted inside the study to see Jaehyun now leaning against his desk with his arms crossed.
“Your Highness,” she bows respectively. “How may I be of service to you?”
“I have a favour to ask of you, Greta,” the way he says her name sends a shiver of fear running down her spine: full of venom and malice.
“Y-yes, sir, what is it?” Her blood is rushing through her. She’s heard of the Prince’s famous glare but never having been on the receiving end, there’s nothing that could have prepared her for the look of bloodlust in his eyes that came about so suddenly.
“I want you to run, Greta,” he pushes himself off the edge the desk, staring directly into her eyes, “and run far.”
A gasp escapes her lips. He heard.
“Well?” He hums, tauntingly, amusement shining in his eyes as he stares at her now trembling form. “What are you waiting for? That’s an order.”
With a shaky nod from her, she’s bustling out of the room and down the hallway. He can still hear the sound of her racing heart even after she makes it to the floor below him.
The malicious grin never leaves his lips as he begins to make his way out of his study. Currently, he is a predator stalking their prey. This’ll be fun, he hasn’t had to chase his prey in a while, and he cannot wait to tear into her throat. How dare she even suggest that you run from him. He would never hurt you. 
Anyone else, on the other hand? Fair game.
“Are you really sure this is necessary, my Prince?” Minho nervously watches Jaehyun as he passes through the doorway into the hall.
“Of course,” Jaehyun smiles, but it only serves to unnerve Minho as Jaehyun’s eyes flash red in the next moment. “She nearly lost me what is mine.”
In the blink of an eye, Jaehyun is gone from his sight, and Minho can only breathe a sigh of relief that he’s left unharmed this evening. Once Jaehyun sets his mind to something, there is no changing it. No one can stop him when he’s on a warpath, and Minho is just glad that he isn’t on the receiving end of one of the Prince’s violent episodes.
It takes Jaehyun mere seconds to catch up with Greta, who has been able to make it into the grand foyer before the main doors. He slams her against the wall, hearing a few of her bones fracture due to the impact. Her whimpers and pleas for her own life fall on deaf ears, even as more servants shuffle passed. They all know not to get involved, lest they want to suffer the same fate as Greta. Too many have learned that the hard way.
The last thing she sees is Jaehyun’s malicious smirk, fangs on full display as he tears into her throat. Once he’s sure she’s dead, he tosses her body aside, letting the blood spill over the floor. He spits the chunk of her neck he has in his mouth onto her body, a look of pure disgust on his face as he glares down at her corpse.
“Somebody clean this mess up,” he snarls out as he turns his back to her body. The others are frozen in fear, but his growl manages to have a few snapping immediately to their senses and rushing over to Greta’s dead body. “Now!”
He doesn’t stick around to see if they remove her or not, opting to head straight to his room for the evening. He wants to see you again, but he knows that it might be too soon. Besides, with his emotions heightened at the moment, he would potentially be putting you in danger. At least he’ll still be able to smell your scent, and hear whatever it is that you’re doing. That’s enough for him, for now.
A smile tugs at his lips as he faintly hears you conversing with Maria about something that happened to you during your childhood. He knew placing Maria with you as your personal assistant would be a good idea. Greta was his mother’s choice, and he had a feeling she was going to be nothing but a nuisance for him. Nothing is going to get in his way of winning your heart. Nothing. Everything has to go according to plan.
The following morning, he does a brief check of the front foyer to make sure everything has been cleaned properly, and that nothing remains of the events of that previous evening. The last thing he wants is for you to see something like that. Seeing that it’s been cleared of any evidence, he smiles, making his way back upstairs to finally greet you for the day.
To be quite honest, he is a little nervous himself for you to meet his mother. She didn’t exactly approve of him essentially stalking you, what he just calls taking a keen interest in making sure you’re doing alright. If Greta was any indication of how his mother will act, he knows she’ll probably devise a plan to take you away from him, or worse, make you afraid of him. After all, she knows exactly how her son can be.
Knocking gently on your door, he can hear your soft footfalls as you walk closer to him. He can’t wait to see you, and when you open the door to reveal yourself he most certainly is not disappointed with what he sees. How you look more beautiful every time he sees you is a mystery to him. One thing he knows for sure though, is that you’ve enchanted him since the moment he first laid eyes on you.
“Good morning, beautiful,” he smiles, noticing how you react positively to his words.
“Good morning,” you greet back politely, a small smile gracing your own features.
“Did you sleep well?” He asks, noticing Maria has already remade your bed.
“Quite,” you nod, smile only widening as you look at him. “Did you?”
“I did indeed,” he hums in response, though he would have slept better if you were in his arms. “Are you ready for today?”
“As ready as I’ll ever be,” you let out a nervous chuckle as you step into the hallway, closing the door gently behind you.
“Don’t worry, I’ll be with you the whole time,” he assures you, extending his arm out for you to loop yours with his. “Let’s get going.”
“Yes, let’s,” you hum back, taking his arm as you begin to walk down the hallway. “Any advice for me before we meet you mother?”
“Just be your usual charming self, and I’m sure you’ll be fine,” he squeezes your arm slightly, causing you to look over to already see him smiling at you.
You say nothing but choose to nod in understanding. You just hope your usual charming self doesn’t do or say anything that might embarrass you.
The two of you make idle chat as you make your way to the throne room to meet his mother. He manages to make you laugh, loosening your tense shoulders slightly as you relax the more he’s able to distract you. The whole time, he observes you fondly, glad to know that he can ease your nerves slightly, even if you’ve only officially known each other for a day. If only he could help you to relax in any and every other way he knows how.
All too soon, you’ve arrived just outside the doors to the throne room. Minho already stands waiting outside the grand set of double doors for the two of you, announcing your arrival to the queen as the doors part for you to walk through. 
Your heart races in your chest, nerves momentarily returning as you’re faced with the task at hand. This is one of the most important moments in your mind, for if his mother doesn’t approve of you, you do not know what will happen. That being said, you want to make sure to make the best impression you can on his mother, no matter what happens.
Walking into the room, you see his mother already sitting on her throne, watching the two of you as you approach where she is seated. Her gaze is scrutinizing, though it seems as if she’s watching he son more closely than she’s watching you. A fact which confuses you slightly since you would have assumed she would be more interested in how you hold yourself around her son rather than how her son holds himself around you. However this may be, you’re only grateful for the momentary relief you feel as you finally stop just before her throne.
“Mother, I’d like to formally introduce you to the woman whom I’d like to become my betrothed,” Jaehyun introduces you, telling her your name shortly after.
“It’s a pleasure to make your acquaintance, Your Majesty,” you say, bowing politely in introduction to the queen.
“Please, Your Majesty sounds so formal,” the queen waves her hand slightly in the air as if dismissing the remark before leaning forwards slightly in her throne, “call me Cathy.”
“Huh,” you muse, “like mother, like son.”
“Oh?” Cathy’s amusement is clear on her face as she looks from Jaehyun over to you.
“Yes,” you confirm. “It seems not liking titles runs in the family. Jaehyun’s also told me to call him by his name instead of his title.”
“Has he now?” Cathy leans back, eyeing her son suspiciously. That’s very unlike her son, as he only ever allows people to call him by his title, no matter who they may be. You must be important to him then, a fact which only causes her worry for you to grow. None of her son’s other playthings ever got to address him by his first name. “And has he been treating you alright so far?”
Jaehyun’s eyes narrow ever so subtly at his mother, for he knows what game she’s playing. Like hell she’ll catch him slipping up.
“He’s been nothing but a gentleman since I’ve arrived,” you respond, and if your words don’t fill his chest with pride, nothing else will. He can hardly wait for you to see what else he has in store for you.
“I see,” she hums, placing her hands gracefully in her lap.
“I’d also just like to thank you very much for your hospitality, and for letting me stay at the palace during this time,” you bow deeply once more. “Thank you.”
“Of course, sweetie,” she smiles. “Anything for the one my little Jaehyunnie has been so obsessed with lately.”
“Mother,” Jaehyun’s reaction is a warning to her, but to you it just sounds like a boy being embarrassed by his mom.
You giggle, and normally he would think it’s the sweetest sound, if not for the circumstances. “So I’ve heard.”
“Ah, I see,” Cathy grins. “He’s already told you all about how he-“
“Are you quite content, mother?” Jaehyun interrupts, eyes flashing his warning towards Cathy who only appears to be amused at his antics.
“Oh, indeed,” she smiles back, though you fail to register the malice hidden behind her lips. “I was only hoping to be joined by Miss (Y/n) here for some morning beverages. I’d love to get to know her better, if she’s alright with that, of course.”
Before Jaehyun can even respond, you’re already speaking, “I’d love that.”
“Excellent!” His mother stands, descending the stairs and coming to stand before you. Having her this close really makes you realize the amount of power and regality she possesses. She extends her hand out for you to take. “If you’d be so kind as to join me.”
“Of course! Thank you,” you take her hand, allowing her to lead you out of the throne room as your arm slips out of Jaehyun’s grasp. With one final glance back, you see Jaehyun already staring after you, an unreadable expression on his face.
Turning back around, you notice Cathy leading you towards the gardens. Once outside, you see a nice table already set up facing the fountain, some of the finest cups and plates already set on top. Letting go of your hand, she motions for you to sit with her, a servant already pouring what looks like a steaming cup of tea for each of you.
“Thank you,” you repeat your words from earlier once you’re seated, graciously accepting the cup that is handed to you.
“I’m so glad you could join me this morning for a little girl talk,” she smiles, tilting her own cup in your direction in a mock ‘cheers’ gesture, of which you mirror.
“It’s nice to be invited,” you reply, taking a sip of your drink.
“I want you to know that you can come to me for anything, dear,” she says, looking you directly in your eyes and you’re momentarily stunned by how sincere she looks. “Absolutely anything.”
“Oh my,” you blink a few times in surprise, “that’s awfully kind of you. I’ll keep that in mind.”
“Good,” her gaze lessens in intensity, allowing for your shoulders to relax slightly, not that you had even been aware of tensing them. “I know how my son can be, so your safety and happiness is my number one priority.”
“Thank you,” is all you can say, and you’re starting to feel like a broken record, but you truly are grateful for her words. Though, you don’t quite know exactly what she means by her most recent ones. Jaehyun, to you, seems like a really nice, caring guy, so the knowing look she sends you when she says that only serves to confuse you. Besides, she seems a lot nicer than what Jaehyun had made her out to be, of which you find a bit strange. Perhaps she’s just putting up a nice front for your sake at the moment. Either way, you’ll make sure not to do anything that would warrant her to dislike you.
“So, tell me about yourself,” Cathy sips her tea, leaning back in her seat to get comfortable as she watches you.
The rest of the morning is spent with the queen, getting a feel for each other and learning all about the other. She listens intently to everything you have to say and she looks genuinely so intrigued by you. The more time you spend with her, the more you seem to relax around her. She’s nothing like how Jaehyun described, which only makes you believe that that’s his familial side talking. Perhaps they’re not as close as the media makes them out to be.
By the time lunch rolls around, you find yourself eating alongside the Queen in the dining room, Jaehyun nowhere to be seen. Noticing your curious gaze, she mentions that he has some diplomatic council meeting to attend to, but he’ll probably be joining you for dinner that evening. You simply nod in response, continuing on with your conversation with the Queen.
Another hour passes with you spending time with Cathy, and the both of you enjoy this so much that you plan to make your little girl talk a weekly thing. You end up leaving with a smile on your face, as if a weight has been lifted off of your shoulders as you head back to your room. Honestly, you cannot wait for next week to be able to spend more time with the Queen, as she’s nothing at all like you were expecting. It’ll be nice to have another person that you can consider a friend while you’re staying here.
Making it back to your room, you’re greeted by Maria who seems to have been patiently waiting for your return. She asks you how your day has been so far, and you tell her honestly that you had a lovely morning with the Queen. 
“I’m a little surprised though,” you admit.
“Why’s that?” She asks, brow furrowing in slight concern.
“Jaehyun told me that she was a hard woman to please,”
“Really?” Her voice comes out in mild disbelief. From what she knows of the Queen, she’s a lovely person through and through. The Prince on the other hand… though she would never tell you that. Not that she could without risk of losing her life and everything she holds dear.
“Still, I’m glad we made such a connection today,” you smile. “That’s good, right? Getting his mom to like me is a step in a positive direction.”
“Of course, Miss,” Maria returns your smile, though it seems a bit forced. She has to be extra careful around you now with how she acts and what she says, after all, by now, every servant in the castle has heard of what happened to Greta last night.
“By the way, how’s Greta doing? I haven’t seen her since yesterday,” you wonder aloud, almost missing the way Maria’s shoulders seem to tense at the inquiry.
“Oh, uh, about that,” Maria says, eyes shifting nervously around the room. She’s just grateful she’s facing away from you at the moment. “Greta took a vacation to go visit her family, so she won’t be back for a while.”
“Ah, I see,” you hum. “That’s nice, hopefully she has a lovely time with her family.”
If only you knew what kind of condition she was in when her body was sent back to her family. Maybe then you would have heeded her warnings.
“Yeah,” Maria replies, somewhat breathless. “Hopefully.”
The next few weeks pass by in a blur for you, each day bringing about a new adventure with Jaehyun. So far, he makes you very happy, and you’re beginning to settle into things at the castle. You especially look forward to the weekly girl talk dates with Cathy, of which she’s asked you to start calling her ‘mom’. Each time she does, you smile shyly and your heart warms, though when you told Jaehyun, he seemed quite shocked.
You’ve also discovered that some of the servants are humans and others are vampires, which was a bit of a surprise to you since you thought all of the servants were humans. At least most of the one’s you’ve encountered so far are. They’ve all been super nice to you, except for the odd one that either looks at you with pity or worry in their eyes. A few even go so far as to attempt to warn you against something, but Jaehyun always appears before they can finish whatever it is that they have to tell you. Whenever this happens, you can never understand the fear that seems to take hold of their body, eyes pleadingly looking towards Jaehyun. Oddly enough, you usually never encounter them again, only hearing brief mention of their names from passing servants.
Of course Jaehyun won’t tell you the amount of teeth he’s pulled, eyes he’s gouged out, or even tongues he’s cut off because of this. No, never. He always has to be the perfect prince in your eyes, keeping you blind to everything that might scare you away from him.
What really sets him off one day is when the two of you had just come back from riding your horses through the grounds. The stable hand, Shotaro, had given you a hand helping you off of your horse. Instead of Jaehyun being the one to help you, he was forced to watch as another male held your hand delicately and smiled at you softly.
Having had a few previous interactions with the vampiric stable hand, you thought nothing of this. A simple friendly gesture to you was near treason in Jaehyun’s eyes. Only he should be able to touch you like that. How else is he supposed to charm you and show you how much of a gentleman he can be towards you? How he can provide for you, even in the most basic of ways?
Luckily, Maria was waiting to lead you back to the castle in order for your weekly girl talk with the Queen. Using this opportunity as you’re walking away, Jaehyun rounds on Shotaro, already seeing the vampire visibly stiffen at the deathly gaze that is sent his way. In the blink of an eye, Jaehyun is in front of him, grasping the same hand Shotaro used to help you down from the horse.
“Scream, and I will end you,” Jaehyun seethes, not giving a second thought as he crushes Shotaro’s hand in his grip, hearing the bones snapping beneath the pressure. The tears he sees threatening to fall from this pest’s eyes only serve to widen the sadistic smile on Jaehyun’s face. “If you ever touch what’s mine again, your hand won’t be the only part of you I shatter. Do I make myself clear?”
“Y-yes, my Prince,” Shotaro stutters out, fear pouring off of him from every angle.
“Now, you better go get that hand of yours fixed up,” Jaehyun tilts his head slightly, a malicious gleam in his eyes. “We wouldn’t want any bones to set and start healing in the wrong place, now would we?”
“N-no, my Prince,” he shakes his head, clutching his broken hand to his chest as soon as Jaehyun releases his grip.
“Good,” Jaehyun hums, a dark expression taking over his features. “Now, get out of my sight.”
Immediately, Shotaro flees the scene, fearing the Prince might inflict more of his wrath upon him. How you haven’t noticed Jaehyun’s eccentric behaviour yet is a mystery. Then again, he purposely keeps you blind to everything bad about his personality, only willing to show you the good parts. Those good parts which are only reserved for you.
Meanwhile, you have just been softly conversing with Maria as she walks with you back up to the castle from the stables. It’s then that you realize that you’ve been walking alone with her for the past two minutes, causing your brow to furrow slightly.
“Where’s Jaehyun?” You verbalize your thoughts, and just as you’re about to turn around to look for him, you feel his comforting hand on the small of your back.
“Sorry to keep you waiting, I had to check up on something back at the stables,” his smile is dazzling and you can’t help but nod your head in understanding as you smile back at him.
Naturally, your arm slides around his, the two of you walking comfortably back into the castle with Maria at your heels. Soon enough, the two of you enter the throne room, a large smile breaking out onto your features as you greet the Queen. A smile which Jaehyun wants only for himself.
“Are you finally going to join us today, Jaehyunnie?” Cathy asks, standing from her seat and making her way towards the two of you.
“Oh, I’d love that,” you look towards him with a hopeful expression, eyes wide.
“Not today, unfortunately,” the look you’re giving him almost makes him change his mind immediately, the pout causing him to gently cup your cheek in his hand, running his thumb over your skin. “Maybe next time.”
“Alright,” you sigh, slightly disappointed. You love spending time with him, almost as much as he does with you. “You promise?”
“I promise,” he smiles, placing a gentle kiss onto your forehead as he reluctantly steps aways from you, only to see his mother observing him carefully. “I’ll see you at dinner.”
“Okay,” you respond, eyes following his figure as he turns and walks out of the room, gaze lingering ever so slightly on the doors even after they’ve closed behind him.
“Ready to go, dear?” Cathy’s voice manages to pull you out of your daze, you nodding in the next moment and following her out into the gardens for your weekly girl talk session.
The afternoon passes with the two of you conversing about how you’re liking staying at the palace so far. You tell her honestly that you’re having a wonderful time, and that everyone seems so nice, except for the odd few who seem to avoid you like the plague. She seemed to only hum in response at that, though you’re not quite sure why.
“How’s your family? Have you been writing to them like I suggested?” Cathy sips her drink, looking at you expectantly.
“Oh, I completely forgot,” you meant to send them a letter last week after she had suggested it, but you got caught up in the plans Jaehyun had made in the afternoon that you forgot all about it. Besides, he didn’t quite look too enthused when you mentioned writing to them, but that could just be your faulty memory. “I should write them today, I do miss them greatly.”
“Would you like to visit them?”
“I’d love to,” you smile softly, not believing it to be possible. “But-“
“Excellent! I’ll make arrangements for you to visit them tomorrow,” Cathy interjects, a chipper expression on her face.
“I don’t know how to thank you enough,” at this point you know not to question her decisions.
“Nonsense,” she places her hand gently on top of yours which has been resting on the table between the two of you. “It’s the least I can do. After all, with how much you talk about your family, I can tell they’re important to you.”
“They are,” you confirm, looking over to meet her fond gaze.
“You have a kind heart, (Y/n),” she hums, shifting her gaze to look out over the garden. “Guard it well.”
You can only smile in return, thoughts running wild as to you finally being able to go visit your mother and your sister since you first arrived at the palace two months ago. Finally, you’ll be able to catch up with them and tell them all about what’s been going on in your life. Maybe if you’re lucky, you can introduce Jaehyun to them as well.
That evening, after Jaehyun has bid you a goodnight, he storms into his mother’s chambers. Throwing the doors open, a loud bang reverberates throughout the room, a few passing servants looking on in fear. Sending a dangerous look their way, Jaehyun manages to scare them off before rounding on his mother.
“You promised to let her see her family tomorrow?” He seethes, voice booming as there’s no fear you may overhear. After all, your room is all the way on the opposite side of the castle.
“Oh, Jaehyunnie, what a pleasant surprise for you to drop by to finally come visit your dear mother,” she feigns interest, sparing him a side glance before going back to her nightly routine.
“Spare the small talk, mother,” he spits, brows furrowed in anger. “Why would you do something like this?”
“Are you that obsessed with isolating the poor girl?” Cathy hums, tilting her head questioningly at her son. “She needs to socialize with other people, she can’t just stay around you the whole time.”
“I’m the only one she needs,” his voice is low, a growl threatening to rise up his throat. “The only one she’ll ever need.”
“You do not own her,”
“I know,” he snaps. “I’ve worked too damn hard to let her go now.”
“You have a lot to realize before you should even think about calling her yours,” Cathy states, hearing her son let out the growl that he had been holding back this whole time. She only looks amused by his reaction. “You cannot control her.”
“Everything’s gone according to plan thus far,” he retorts, crossing his arms in front of his chest. “Besides a few minor set backs which have been disposed of.”
“Ah, yes,” she muses. “I’d appreciate if you stopped mutilating my servants, let alone killing them.”
“It’s no less than they deserve,” he counters.
“And what does your beloved think about that side of you?”
A brief moment of silence settles around the room, speaking volumes in Cathy’s eyes, until he breaks it.
“She doesn’t know,” Jaehyun watches his mother move around her room carefully, eyes narrowed in distaste. “She never will."
“My child, there will come a day when her eyes are opened to see your true colours,” Cathy warns, pausing in her step to turn and look down upon Jaehyun with her nose upturned. 
“Is that a threat, mother?” His eyes hold a crazed look in them at the mere idea of you finding out the truth. Hell, even the thought of you being taken away from him sets his instincts into overdrive, causing his eyes to bleed red and another growl to escape his throat.
“It’s not a threat if I only speak the truth,” she replies calmly, only causing his anger to flare more than it already has. “Do not expect her to return with you after visiting her family tomorrow. I have been keeping in touch with them regarding this entire situation and they know the lengths you are willing to go to ensnare her. The lengths you have already gone. I don’t know what you told Minho to tell her mother that first day that has her so terrified of the consequences, but her sister, Lori, was it? She seems to have a level head on her shoulders.”
Jaehyun’s blood boils, eyes filling with fury as they remain red, “you’ve been doing what?”
“Warning them about you and devising a plan to free the lovely Miss (Y/n) from your clutches,” her brow quirks as she watches her son fume before her very eyes. 
“I’ll kill them if they so much as even try,” he hisses, chest heaving with every breath as he is thrown into this situation. He’s come this far, there’s no way he’s letting you go now.
“Not if I have anything to do with it,” Cathy’s voice is steady, firm in her command of the room. “Enough blood has already been spilt on your account.”
“Clearly, there hasn’t been enough,” Jaehyun growls, eye flashing once more at his mother.
Rising to her full height, the Queen does not take the underlying threat from her son lightly, “you dare threaten me? Let’s not forget who brought you into this world and who taught you all that you know. Be careful, boy, lest your ambitious lust go to your head.”
“I don’t care who you may be to me, mother,” he seethes, straightening his back and matching her ferocity with his own, “but if you so much as even attempt to take what’s mine away from me, I’ll kill you.”
Without another word between them, Jaehyun is storming out of his mother’s room, leaving her standing with a shocked expression on her face. Never, in all of her long years of putting up with his antics has she ever seen him look this serious, this deadly about something in her life. Her worry only grows for you as she thinks of what he may have in store for you in the future. Going forward, she’ll have to be extra cautious, preparing herself for whatever her son has planned to come.
The next morning, you wake up bright and early, excited to finally go visit your family again after being away from them for so long. You hardly got any sleep at all last night, considering how excited you are. Being able to catch them up to everything going on in your life will be like a dream come true, and besides, you never did get your clothes from your mom that she promised to send to the palace, and you really miss your favourite sweater.
“You’re awfully happy this morning,” Maria comments as she does your hair for the day.
“I am,” you agree. “I haven’t seen my family in months and I can’t wait to introduce them to Jaehyun.”
“That’ll be lovely!” Maria replies, though you catch her grimace in the mirror.
“What is it?” You question, eyes wide with concern.
“Nothing to worry yourself about,” she tells you, shrugging off your inquiries.
“Clearly it’s something,” you counter, to which she sighs.
“I hate to be the bearer of bad news, but the Prince will not be joining you right away this morning,” Maria admits, to which your expression drops slightly.
“Oh,”
“But don’t worry! He told me to tell you that he’d be along as soon as he can,” Maria continues, giving your shoulders a quick rub in encouragement. “He just has a few things to tend to first. You know, political duties and such.”
“I understand,” you nod, still visibly disappointed you won’t be arriving at the same time, nor travelling together this morning.
“Come on, dear, let’s get you changed,” she gives your shoulders one final pat before leading you to the closet to finish getting you ready for the day.
After a quick breakfast with the Queen, you’re being ushered into the back of a car to head back home for the day. The whole car ride over feels like an eternity, the scenery not being able to distract you one bit. 
Restless wouldn’t even begin to be able to describe you, your eyes flitting everywhere inside the car, then out the window, only to repeat the same process over and over again. Even your leg hasn’t stopped bouncing in anticipation, fingers toying with the edge of your shirt just to have something to do.
Eventually, after what feels like hours to you, you arrive in a familiar neighbourhood. Once the car is parked, you step out onto a familiar driveway, a smile gracing your features as you breathe in the fresh air. The driver has only been instructed to drop you off since Jaehyun will be by later, accompanied by Minho to take you back to the palace. Once he sees you’re safe, he’s starting the engine once more and pulling out of the driveway. This way you can have some privacy before the Prince arrives. Cathy made sure of that.
Making your way up your front porch, there’s a slight spring to your step, pushing open the front door in the next moment and calling out a cheerful ‘I’m home’! Oh, how good it feels, too.
“(Y/n)?” You hear your mother’s voice sound from the kitchen before her head is peeking out from the doorway, eyes wide with disbelief. “Is that you?”
“Hey, mom,” you greet, kicking off your shoes and running over to embrace her, her arms already spread open in anticipation.
“It’s so good to see you again, sweetie,” she says, hugging you even closer than before, almost as if she’s afraid you’ll disappear in a moment’s notice. “When the queen sent notice last night of you coming to visit this morning, I could hardly believe it.”
“More like you couldn’t believe it,” Lori’s voice sounds from the entranceway behind you, causing a large grin to spread on your face as you turn around to face your younger sister. “Where’s the Prince? I’m surprised you two aren’t joined at the hip.”
You roll you eyes at this, “it’s lovely to see you, too, Lori. I’ve missed you so much.”
She merely sticks her tongue out at you in response, coming over to squish you in a hug in the next second. “Yeah, yeah, I missed you, too.”
Despite her grumbling, you can tell she means what she says, if the tightness of her hug is anything to go by. You can tell she’s also missed teasing you, just as you’ve missed teasing her.
“If you must know,” you say, pulling away from Lori after a long hug. “Jaehyun will be coming by later, he’s just got a few things to attend to first. He sends his regards, though, for the time being.”
“Wow, first name basis with the Prince,” Lori whistles lowly. “That’s a shocker considering I’ve heard that he doesn’t let just anyone call him that.”
“Lori,” your mother shoots a warning look at your sister.
“What? It’s the truth,” she shrugs, only causing you to chuckle.
“Well, we are pretty close,”
“I’ll say,” Lori hums. “Speaking of, has he ever told you why he chose you, or how he even found out about you in the first place?”
“Lori, my word,” your mother shoots her another look, as if to tell her to quit while she’s ahead.
“Mom, it’s okay,” you chuckle, voice nothing but reassuring. “I always knew my little sister was concerned for me, no matter how badly she tries to hide it. As a matter of fact, yes. I have asked him before.”
“And?” She motions with her hand for you to continue.
“He told me that one day while he was out he saw me and overheard the conversation I was having with Jaemin - remember how we always banter back and forth?” Seeing her nod, you continue, “anyways, he apparently appreciated my wit and humour and decided to learn more about me. Well, here we are.”
The smile you send your mother and sister only serves to unnerve them slightly. They’ve been told not to tell you that Jaemin has gone missing since you’ve left for the palace.
“You believe him?” Lori gives you a ‘really’ look, brow quirked in disbelief.
“I have no reason not to,” you shrug.
By now, the two of you have sat down at the kitchen table, your mother busy with preparing lunch for all of you.
“You know how crazy that sounds, though, right?” She goes on to say. “After eavesdropping on your conversation he suddenly wants you to move to the palace so he can make you his wife? That’s very strange.”
“I mean, I was a little weirded out at first, but after he explained himself I felt better,” you say, leaning back slightly in your chair in order to relax. “I trust him.”
At your words, Lori only seems even more suspicious, your mother distracting you long enough for her to hide her concern.
“That’s nice, dear,” she smiles at you. “You must really like him, then.”
You hum in agreement, “I really do.”
“So,” your mother begins, sitting down to join you two at the table as the food heats up on the stove, “tell us everything.”
It takes you about an hour and a half to explain everything that’s happened to you since your arrival at the castle all those weeks ago. The whole while, your mother and sister listen patiently to what you have to say, chiming in here and there with little comments of their own. Your mother seems happy for you, but you can tell your sister isn’t all that convinced. Her comment about the Prince not being everything he seems to be certainly is enough to rub you the wrong way, putting a slight damper on your mood the longer you spend at home.
“All I’m just saying is that he seems too nice, from what you’re telling me,” her eyes hold the same suspicion you can hear clearly in her voice.
“He’s given me no reason to suspect otherwise,” you counter, a slight furrow to your brows.
“Yet he’s never once suggested visiting us, and when you do, he’s nowhere to be found,” Lori quirks a brow at you.
“It’s not his fault he has duties to attend to,” you defend him, upset that your sister doesn’t seem nearly as happy for you as you thought she’d be.
“Does he always have ‘duties’ to attend to when there’s something you want to do?” A knowing look is sent your way, as if she already knows how you’re going to answer. “If you’re always alone there, then why don’t you just come home? It sounds to me like you’d be better off that way, anyways.”
“No!” You immediately counter, crossing your arms in front of your chest, hurt that your own sister would even suggest something like this. “That’s not the case. He’s been nothing but caring and respectful towards me since I got there. I don’t expect him to wait on me hand and foot all the goddamn time. It’s nice having some space every once in a while, too.” You can tell you’ve momentarily stunned her with your answer as she looks at you, dumbfounded. Taking this opportunity, you continue, “if all you’re going to do is shit on my happiness, then I won’t bother to come home at all. I care about him and I know he cares about me, and all you’re doing is making your jealousy clear. I don’t want to move back home, I want to stay with him. I-“ you swallow, gathering your courage to utter your next words, “I’m in love with him.”
A soft gasp leaves your mother’s lips, “sweetie.”
“What?” You turn your attention to look at her, noticing how she’s already staring at you with an unreadable expression on her face, your sister sitting frozen in her spot at your admission.
“You love him,” comes your sister’s voice. Not a question, but a mere statement of facts, of which causes you to gape slightly before closing your mouth and steadying yourself. You let out a breath that you didn’t realize you’d been holding.
“I do,” you confirm, staring both women down as they stare back at you. Your mother with a dumbfounded expression, your sister with a stern gaze that feels as if it’s boring into your soul.
A moment of silence passes over the three of you as they let your confession sink in, only interrupted by a soft knock at the door.
“I’ll get it,” your mother sighs, heading towards the front door to see who it could be.
“He has you wrapped around his finger, doesn’t he?” Lori sighs, causing whatever last thread of patience you had to snap at her remark.
Your snappy retort dies in your throat as soon as you hear a familiar masculine voice coming from the front door, Jaehyun politely introducing himself to your mother after being invited inside.
“Speak of the devil, and he shall appear,” Lori mutters, shaking her head.
In an instant, you’re standing, the scraping of your chair against the floor enough to cause Lori to look up at you in surprise at the sudden action. You say nothing as you head out of the kitchen and towards the front door, Lori following shortly afterwards with a frown prominent on her face.
To everyone’s surprise, you start to slip on your shoes. Out of the corner of your eyes, you see Minho shoot you a worried look while your mother and sister share a glance. However, none look as concerned as Jaehyun does right now.
“Is everything alright?” He asks lowly, hand finding purchase on your lower back as you right yourself after fixing your one shoe.
“Fine,” you respond shortly, to the surprise of everyone in the room. “Thanks for lunch, mom. It was really nice seeing you again.”
You move over to give her a brief hug. It takes her a moment to return it, unsure of what exactly has transpired in the past minute to have you rushing out of the door so soon. You seemed so excited for them to meet the Prince earlier, so this only serves to increase her worry.
“Of course, dear,” she answers. “Is everything okay?”
You pull away, giving her a tight smile, “just a bad headache, is all.”
“Are you sure you don’t just want to lie down for a bit? You just got here,” she frowns, worry evident on her features along with a hint of what looks like sadness.
“I’m sure,” you reply, sending her a weak smile in return. 
One thing you’ve always been horrible at is hiding your emotions. Anyone can read them clear as day on your face, especially right now. That’s one thing Jaehyun has learned about you during your stay at the palace, and he’ll be damned if he doesn’t find out what happened. For now, he’ll simply go along with your wishes, playing the part of the concerned lover. Good thing, too, otherwise if a moment longer had passed, he probably would have torn Lori’s head from her shoulders for causing you such distress.
Even though he’s only just entered the house, he’s been outside far longer than any of you have suspected. Of course he overheard what the three of you had been talking about, and your family’s attitudes certainly rubbed him the wrong way. He knows his own mother definitely has something to do with the way Lori is acting. Thank fuck she won’t be a problem any more.
The only good thing his mind has latched onto at the moment is your loving confession. He has to remind himself to stay in control of his emotions for the time being, lest he want his plans to be ruined. After all, things are going far better than he could have ever hoped on this end.
“Okay, sweetie, if you’re sure,” even though she doesn’t look convinced, she doesn’t push the issue. “Come and visit again soon!”
“We will,” you give her another small smile that doesn’t quite reach your eyes.
Giving one final nod to your mother, you hardly even spare Lori a final glance as you bid her farewell, the both of them waving goodbye to you from the front porch. Once seated in the backseat of the car beside Jaehyun, you let out a sigh.
“Is everything okay, Princess?” His voice holds nothing but concern as he motions for Minho to raise the privacy screen.
You finally meet his gaze, and he curses whoever was the one to cause you pain, “honestly, not really.”
He shifts closer, placing a comforting hand on your knee, “did you want to talk about it?”
A few moments pass by in silence as you attempt to calm yourself down. Taking a deep breath, you meet his gaze once more.
“She called you a devil,” he inhales sharply at your words, feigning shock. “And I know how much you hate that word, let alone being called such a thing. I just couldn’t sit there and listen to any more of Lori’s bullshit slander of you.”
“I see,” he says, lips tugging downwards in a frown. On the inside though, he’s surprised that you even remembered him telling you that offhandedly one of the first times you went horseback riding together. It warms his heart that you would remember a detail like that of himself. Though, this only serves to confirm to him even further that you’re perfect for each other.
“I’m sorry,” you apologize for your family’s behaviour. “I just couldn’t stand how she was talking about you, or the fact that I felt like they were invalidating my feelings.”
“It’s not your fault,” he assures you, shifting so that his hand can now gently stroke your back as you lean forward to rest your elbows on your knees.
“I was looking forward to you meeting them, too,” you pout, disappointment clear in your voice. “I’m sorry about that.”
“It’s alright, Darling,” he sends you a reassuring smile. “If I’m being completely honest, I’m kind of glad we left early. I don’t think I would have had the heart to be proper company to your loved ones.”
This time, it’s your turn to look at him in concern, “is everything okay?”
“Not really,” he shoots you a weak smile, his facade cracking just as he had planned from the moment you decided to leave your house as soon as he had arrived. “No.”
“What’s wrong?” You cup his cheek tenderly, and he leans into your touch, briefly closing his eyes as he revels in the way your skin feels against his, though you take it as him seeking comfort for whatever it is he’s about to tell you.
“It’s my mother,” he pauses, swallowing a fake lump in his throat. “She’s been murdered.”
“Oh my god,” a gasp escapes your lips, a hand coming up to cover your mouth in shock.
“I was only just informed minutes before I arrived at your house,”
“Oh, Jaehyun,” your eyes hold nothing but sorrow as you embrace him, “I’m so sorry.”
“You’re doing an awful lot of apologizing today for things that aren’t your fault,” he comments, wrapping his arms securely around your waist as he pulls you closer into his chest.
“Still,” you whisper into his neck, “I’m sorry for your loss. Your mother was a wonderful person.”
A hum is all you receive in response, his grip tightening ever so subtly around you as he feels you start to shake slightly. He knew the two of you were close, but he wasn’t expecting you to shed actual tears when you learnt his mother had passed. Perhaps it’s the combination of emotions from your family mixed with this sudden news that has you curled up in his arms, seeking his comfort as much as you are comforting him. Either way, he’ll use this to his advantage, loving the feeling of having you pressed so close to him, clinging onto him like he’s the only one you’ll ever need.
Quietly, he shushes you, telling you that it’ll be alright. You’re quite surprised at how well he’s taking all of this, though you can tell he’s glad for the comfort you provide him during this time. However, what you fail to see is Jaehyun glancing briefly towards the window, eyes flashing as he catches his reflection in the glass. A look of smug content resides on his features as he continues to stroke your back in comforting circles.
You manage to fall asleep about halfway through the car ride back to the castle. Your head is resting on Jaehyun’s lap as he gently strokes his hand over your hair. A smile pulls at his lips when he hears you hum in content, shifting yourself closer to him in response.
Growing up the way he did, getting everything he ever wanted or could ever ask for, and hardly ever receiving punishments for his actions, he’s used to others shouting and crying about how unfair he can be. The amount of people he’s seen beg for their life with tears in their eyes has never made him blink one time. However, seeing you this upset, with tears in your eyes has made him promise himself to never see you cry again. You’re the only person in this universe he cannot stand to see in pain, and he will do anything and everything in his power to make sure that this never happens again. You deserve nothing but happiness, of which he knows only he can give you.
The news of the Queen’s death spreads throughout the nation like wildfire. Many demand answers as to how something like this could have happened, as well as who would do such a thing. Luckily, Jaehyun had prepared for this. A few servants, both human and vampire alike, that had tested his patience for far too long took the fall, information leaking that the murder was an inside job long planned out by said servants.
Jaehyun played his part well, condemning the criminals for their vile acts and taking his precious mother away from him, as well as the precious matriarch away from the citizens. The best part is that you were there the whole time comforting him and making sure he was okay. 
Those were some of the best days for him, being able to stay by your side nearly twenty-four seven, being able to hold you in his arms as you slept beside him. Fuck, he can never get enough of you: your soft skin beneath his fingertips, the way your body feels pressed against his own, the way you stood by him and offered him condolence when he needed it, and especially the way you smell. There were a few times he nearly went feral during the night due to your scent spiking with arousal. He could tell you were having some pretty nice dreams about him, for the one time you moaned his name in your sleep, nearly driving him insane.
He only wishes he had done this sooner, maybe then your sister wouldn’t be even more suspicious towards him. The letters from her only seemed to increase after his mother’s death, but he has no time for them, nor does he even want to entertain them. Maybe then he can finally have you all to himself without worrying about what your stupid brat of a younger sister might do to take you away from him. No matter, he’ll make sure to dispose of her soon, if she doesn’t stay in line.
Approximately two weeks after his mother’s funeral, Jaehyun takes you on a small picnic beneath the willow tree that overlooks the gardens. The place is secluded enough that you know you won’t be disturbed. After all, after the commotion of the past few weeks, it’s nice to just get away for a while, especially with just the two of you.
Currently, his head is resting in your lap, the two of you finally able to relax and enjoy each other’s company without interruptions. Glancing down, Jaehyun catches your gaze.
“Have I told you how beautiful you look today yet?” He smiles softly up at you as he watches the evening sun kiss your skin.
“Hmm,” you pretend to ponder his question, gazing out over the gardens as you teasingly tap your chin. “I don’t think you have.”
“It’s a shame, then,” he clicks his tongue, shaking his head slightly. “All the stars in both heaven and on earth could never compare to your beauty.”
The way he looks at you, like you’re his entire world, sets your heart racing in your chest. You bite your lip, looking away bashfully.
Sitting up, he lets out a small chuckle at your reaction. How can you be so cute?
“Don’t hide that pretty face from me, Darling,” cupping your chin gently in his hand, he turns your head to face him, noticing how you avert your gaze slightly in embarrassment. Pride swells in his chest as he knows only he can get a reaction like this out of you. Only he can make you feel this way. “From the moment I first laid eyes on you, I knew you were the one for me.”
“Jae,” the whisper of his name from your lips sends a shiver down his spine.
“Getting to know you over these past few months has only confirmed my first thought I had of you,” he tells you, stroking his thumb slowly over your bottom lip as you watch him carefully.
“Oh?” Your gaze becomes hooded as you watch him, his own eyes focussed on the way his thumb is caressing your lip. “What might that be?”
“You’re perfect,” his voice is low, seductive, as he moves his hand to the back of your neck, thumb now stroking the nape.
“You must not have met many good people, then,” you lightly joke, the corner of your lip twitching upwards as your eyes flick to his lips, noticing how the space between the two of you grows ever smaller by the second.
“No,” he replies softly, “I haven’t.”
Your hand comes up to cup the side of his face, thumb rubbing his cheek tenderly as the two of you continue to stare into each other’s eyes. A moment of silence passes between the two of you before Jaehyun is breaking it.
“Can I kiss you?”
“I thought you’d never ask,”
You barely have time to finish your words when his lips are on yours, the hand he has placed on the back of your neck pulling you in closer. His touch is soft, lips delicate over your own, as if you’re the finest piece of glass that needs to be handled with the utmost care. Your eyes flutter shut.
This tender moment is enough to steal your breath away, something that Jaehyun never fails to do when you’re alone with him. How you got him of all people to fall for you is still a wonder, of which everyday you’re thankful for. Ever since he’s come into your life, you’ve never been happier. Each day with him is another where he makes you feel special. He cherishes you, just as you have come to cherish him, but more than all of that, he makes you feel loved.
Pulling away, he rests his forehead on yours, the hand on the back of your neck holding you in place as your eyes open to see him already gazing at you fondly.
“Like I said,” he breathes. “Perfect.”
“I could say the same about you,” you hum, pecking his lips once more and causing him to smile.
He hums back, content with how this evening is going so far, and with one final lingering kiss to your lips, he pulls away from you, albeit a bit reluctantly. If he’s honest with himself, he’s a bit nervous. The question he’s been meaning to ask you this entire evening sits at the tip of his tongue, unwilling to actually be formed into the proper words.
“I love you,” this is not the first time he’s told you this, but it still sets your heart aflutter. Maybe this time will be the time you say it back.
“I know,” you hum, lips tugging upwards as your eyes reflect the same love and want shining in his own.
“Even though we haven’t know each other all that long, no one makes me feel the way that you do,” he begins, again, somewhat nervously. You take his one hand into yours, letting him know he can take all the time he needs to in order to form the words he wants to say to you. “You mean the world to me, and I don’t know what I’d do without you in my life. I know it sounds ridiculous, but my life changed the day you stepped through those palace doors, and I wouldn’t want it any other way. You’ve changed my life for the better; you make me want to be a better man.”
“Jaehyun,” his name is but a whisper on your lips as he pulls out a ring from his pocket.
“Will you do me the honour of becoming mine?” He asks, gaze locking on yours as your hands come up to cover your mouth in shock. 
All you can do at the moment is nod your head, a large smile breaking out onto your face before it morphs into a slight smirk as he slides the ring on your finger. “Does this mean I get to call you mine?”
“You can call me whatever you’d like,” he grins, eyes hooded as he pulls you onto his lap to admire the ring now glinting on your finger. “My perfect bride.”
Your giggle is like music to his ears as he pulls you in for another kiss. This one is more heated, full of passion and longing with an undertone of a promise of what is still yet to come. 
Jaehyun could not be happier than he is in this moment with you. Everything has gone according to plan, and soon, he’ll get to call you his wife. Not that you would have had a choice in the matter, even if you had denied him. Now, you’re his, indefinitely, and nothing can change that. Now, he’s never letting you go.
As the sun begins to set in the distance, it’s your turn to rest your head on his thigh. He’s currently feeding you some red grapes, of which he’s been told are your favourite.
“What else we got?” You ask after a having a few more grapes.
“Hmm, let’s see,” he digs through the basket, pulling out and listing the different food options. “Why, do you not like the grapes?”
“I do, don’t get me wrong,” you smile reassuringly at him. “I’m just not the biggest fan of red grapes.”
“I thought they were your favourite,” Jaehyun replies, a small frown pulling at his features. Who was it again that told him that red grapes were your favourite? Ah, that’s right, Ben. If he had known they weren’t your favourite he would have never even dreamed of having them packed for you.
“Nah,” you scrunch your nose slightly while shaking your head. Jaehyun would think it’s cute were not for the situation he finds himself in. “Green grapes are where it’s at.”
“I’ll keep that in mind,” he smiles, though you don’t registered how it looks slightly forced.
Shooting him a smile back, the two of you turn your attention back to the sunset before you, making small comments here and there about the way the light reflects off of the surrounding areas. You feel completely at peace. Jaehyun on the other hand, is suffering from inner turmoil at this mistake. Something that is so small could have meant a world of difference to you, and the last thing he wants is to screw things up this far into your relationship. How is he supposed to be the perfect lover if he can’t even get your favourite foods correct?
The moment he bids you a goodnight and your door shuts behind him that evening, he’s speeding to the kitchen. The staff, whom had been finishing up for the day are startled by his sudden appearance. Immediately, they bow in respect, a few of the cook’s nerves spiking in fear that what they had prepared this evening did not please him.
“Where’s Ben?” His voice booms throughout the room, eyes deadly as they scan the area for the aforementioned man. 
“He’s just gone to dispose of the trash, Your Highness,” one of the cooks tells him.
“How fitting,” he muses, already thumbing the coin in his pocket which he had grabbed from the cellar on the way here.
The side door to the kitchen creaks slightly when it opens, a lanky man walking through in the next moment. Sensing the tension in the kitchen, he freezes, the door falling shut behind him. Noticing Jaehyun standing at the opposite end of the counter, he immediately bows.
“Your Highness,” 
“Red grapes, huh, Ben?” At Jaehyun’s words, Ben stiffens, already knowing something must have gone wrong for the Prince to be in the kitchen this late.
The rest of the staff share brief glances towards one another in confusion as they watch the scene before them play out. None are willing enough to move for fear of the Prince’s wrath.
“Do you know what this is?” Though his voice is calm, Jaehyun is far from it, only able to maintain his composure due to the fear radiating off of everyone in this room. He loves knowing the power he holds over each one of their insignificant little lives.
Ben eyes the coin now poised in Jaehyun’s hand warily, the metal glinting ever so slightly in the light of the kitchen.
“A coin, Your Highness,” Ben answers as Jaehyun looks at him expectantly, obviously wanting more than just that as his answer. “The ones which you use to pay us.”
“Very good,” he feigns amusement, eyes narrowing harshly in the next moment. “Now tell me, what’s the point in paying you when you provide me with the wrong information?”
Ben looks stunned momentarily, “I’m sorry, I don’t follow.
“Red grapes, Ben,” Jaehyun tuts. “Red. Grapes.”
It seems as if something clicks in his mind, “oh, yes, (Y/n)’s fav-“
“You dare speak her name in my presence?” Jaehyun’s voice booms, a few of the younger staff now visibly shaking in fear at his outburst. “Do not taint my love’s name with your tongue.”
“My apologies-“
“Silence, you scum,” he hisses between clenched teeth. Jaehyun’s anger currently knows no bounds, only serving to worsen the longer he has to deal with this situation. Taking a breath, he seems to visibly calm down slightly before speaking once more. “Did you know, Ben, that she prefers green grapes over red ones?”
It is then that Ben realizes his mistake. The information he had gathered proving insufficient and false. He starts to shake, unsure of what is to become of him now.
“I’m sorry, my Prince, it will not happen again,”
“You’re right,” Jaehyun smirks. “It won’t. Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have an engagement party to plan,” he turns to leave the kitchen, tossing the coin he’s holding in his hand in the air once before catching it between his fingers. “Oh, and somebody clean this mess up.”
In the blink of an eye, Jaehyun has flung the coin through Ben’s head, a dull thunk being the only sound heard as his now lifeless body falls to the floor. The whole kitchen remains silent, no one daring to even move a single muscle until Jaehyun has turned the corner, nothing but the coin embedded in the wall serving as a reminder of his presence mere moments ago.
The following week passes by in a blur to you, the whole castle bustling from the news of your confirmed engagement to the Prince. Now, there is cause for celebration instead of remaining in the period of mourning that had plagued the nation previously. You only wish his mother was still here to see it all.
You’ve planned to host an engagement party this coming Friday evening, and you can hardly wait. The two of you have been discussing plans for the event, and you don’t think you’ve smiled brighter than you have been these past few days. Jaehyun has been with you every step of the way, sharing in your excitement at the date grows near.
All too soon, the night of the party arrives and you’re dressed in the finest materials you’ve ever worn. Quite a few diplomats and vampires from surrounding kingdoms are coming to wish you a congratulations on your engagement to the Prince, and to say you’re nervous would be an understatement. You just hope you don’t make a fool of yourself in front of so many important people.
Jaehyun, on the other hand, cannot wait to show you off. Finally, he gets to profess his love for you in front of so many others, finally letting everyone know that you’re his and his alone. If anyone so much as dares to take you away from him, he’s prepared to do whatever it takes to keep you and make sure you never leave his side. Nothing, in all of the world, could tear the two of you apart.
Luckily, the evening goes by without a hitch, passing by much quicker than either of you two expect. Though, you have to say, you’re glad. With the way he’s been looking at you all night, the end of the party could not have come sooner.
Making your way back to your room, you think back to the events of the evening. A smile tugs at your lips as you recall the way the two of you danced, the way he held you close in his arms and made you feel loved. You couldn’t ask for a better man to have come to sweep you off of your feet. You only hope that the night doesn’t end here, and from the dark look you still see swimming in his eyes, you have a feeling that it’s only just begun.
With the way Jaehyun has been looking at you this entire evening, you swear he wants to eat you whole. His eyes are dark, a smirk on his lips as he backs you into the wall of your room, hands finding purchase on your hips as he leans into your neck, inhaling deeply.
“Fuck, you smell so good,” he breathes, eyes fluttering closed in bliss as he allows your scent to cloud his mind. A growl escapes him, finally allowing himself to indulge his fantasies, revelling in everything you. “All mine.”
You cannot deny the way your heart positively flutters at his words, and from the way his grip tightens, you can tell he is enjoying each and every one of your reactions. After weeks of tensions rising, interrupted moments and longing glances sent each other’s way, you know what you want, and you what you want, is him. Badly. 
“I hope you don’t mind, Princess,” his voice is low, nose ghosting over the skin of your neck until his lips come to rest right beside your ear, “but tonight,” he hisses as you pull him closer, “tonight, I’m going to make you mine.”
Bringing his lips to yours, he steals a kiss, loving the way you hum approvingly in response. He loves all the reactions you’re giving him, he thinks they’re so cute. The way your heart is racing in your chest, excitement rolling off of you in waves, sets his own dead heart racing. He can smell your arousal building, a fact which only makes his chest swell, a growl of approval building from deep within.
He could get lost in you. The feeling of your lips on his, your scent, your touch. Everything about you drives him wild, and tonight, he finally gets to show you exactly what you mean to him. He’ll treat you like the royalty you are; whom you are meant to be.
Breaking the kiss, he leans back slightly to rest his forehead on yours, staring deeply into your eyes. You can see the love he has for you shining in them, along with the lust and desire swirling within his irises.
“I’m addicted to you,” voice nothing but a whisper, he cups your cheeks in his hands, “I can never get enough.”
“Then don’t,” your soft reply has his eyes widening slightly. “Because I don’t think I could ever love another as much as I love you.”
He swears his dead heart has once again stopped beating in his chest as he lets your words sink in. You love him. You finally told him that you love him.
A smile breaks out onto his face as he claims your lips with his own. You love him, and that’s all he’s ever wanted. Everything he could have ever asked for has just been granted to him. You’ve fulfilled his every wish, and tonight, he’s going to finally make you his, in every meaning of the word. Tonight, you’re his Queen, and his alone.
“Fuck, you don’t know how happy you’ve just made me, hearing you say that,” he says against your lips, needing to feel every inch of your skin beneath him soon, or he might just go crazy. Your giggle is music to his ears as he litters your face with kisses, “I love you.” He hums contently. “My Queen.”
Your breath hitches as you hear him call you that for the first time. You cannot deny the way your stomach clenches at hearing him call you that, and from the slight upturn of his lips, you know he heard your reaction loud and clear.
Feeling a surge of confidence wash over you, you look into his eyes once more, smirk dancing across your own lips. 
“Then fulfill your promise and make me yours,” you purr. “My King.”
A shiver runs down his spine at your words, and he cannot help the snarl that escapes him, “with pleasure.”
In the blink of an eye, he has you pinned on the bed, hovering over top of you as he trails his lips over the skin of your neck. Pinning your hands at the side of your head by your wrists, he takes this opportunity to start sucking marks into your skin, biting down occasionally. Although he doesn’t let his fangs out yet, he makes sure to leave his marks. He wants everyone in the kingdom to know that you’re his, that he’s finally claimed you for all to see.
The sound of tearing fabric registers in your mind, and you glance down to see that Jaehyun has torn both your dress and his shirt from this evening from your bodies, eyes drinking in every curve of your figure beneath him. His hands come up to cup your breasts, thumbs brushing over your nipples as they harden from his touch.
“Beautiful,” he hums.
Giving your chest a slight squeeze, he emphasizes his approval, only serving to make you become bashful. In the next moment, you attempt to cover yourself with your arms, but he’s quicker. Grabbing your wrists, he pins them beside your head once more.
“Ah-ah,” he tuts, a gleam to his eyes, “don’t you dare hide from me.”
Before you can say anything in response, his lips are on yours as he successfully steals your breath away for the nth time that night. Ever so slowly, he parts from you, trailing kisses down your neck and to your chest, where his hands have returned to cupping your breasts gently. 
A shiver runs down your spine once you feel him take one of your nipples into his mouth, sucking lightly as his tongue flicks over the pert bud. His opposite hand works at the other, making sure neither goes untouched. Your satisfied hum is all he needs to hear to know you’re enjoying yourself so far. Smirking against your skin, he trails kisses from one breast to the other as he takes his time to make sure each gets the attention you deserve. By the time he’s done with you, you’ll be screaming his name in ecstasy all night long.
A hand in his hair catches his attention as you guide his head back up to yours, lips meeting in a heated kiss. He can never get enough of you: your taste, your touch, your everything, and he’ll take everything you’re willing to give him, and then some.
Slowly, he grinds himself into you, your legs parting naturally for him to fit between them. The gasp you let out when you feel his hard cock rubbing against your core is music to his ears.
“Feel that, baby?” He hums, nuzzling his nose against your neck and scenting you once more. “That’s all because of you. You have no idea what you do to me.”
The breathless whisper of his name you let out sends a shiver of pleasure down his spine. His one hand grips your thigh, pulling you against him as your fingers tangle in his hair, pulling him in to kiss you again as he continues to grind himself into you.
Breaking away, he nips at the skin of your neck, trailing kisses down your body. The whole time, he mumbles against your skin about how he just needs to taste you, your panties being ripped off of your body not even a second later.
The full force of the scent of your arousal hits him as he settles between your legs, a pleased growl echoing from within his chest. He can already tell his eyes have bled red, your slight gasp confirming it when you meet his gaze.
Trailing kisses up your thighs, he notices how your chest rises and falls with each breath in anticipation. A smirk dances at his lips as he sees you close your eyes momentarily the closer to your entrance his mouth gets. 
Testing the waters, he licks a tentative strip up your core, watching your every reaction and drinking it in. Fuck, if you aren’t the best thing he’s ever tasted in his life, and he’s sure to let you know.
At his words, you cover your face in slight embarrassment, feeling every breath he makes hit your core and send little jolts throughout your entire body. From the chuckle you hear him let out, he knows exactly what he’s doing.
“No, no, no, none of that,” he reaches up and pulls your arm down so you’re no longer covering your face. You meet his gaze once more, and your heart nearly stops at the carnal hunger you can see shining within them. “I want you to watch me as I devour you.”
A moan slips passed your lips as you watch him bring a hand up to spread your lower lips, tongue slowly dragging through your folds all the while he stares deeply into your eyes. Every sound you make, every reaction, is his tonight, and his alone.
Wrapping his lips around your clit, he sucks a few times before flicking the sensitive nub with the tip of his tongue. He alternates between this and bringing his tongue down to circle your entrance before thrusting it in to collect your juices, massaging your inner walls at the same time. Like hell he’s going to let anything go to waste, not after he’s waited this long to finally have you all to himself.
Your hips start to move in time with his tongue, and he lets out a snarl as your hand comes to tangle in his hair, only serving to pull him closer into you. His tongue continues to work you up in every way he knows how, wanting you to know that only he can please you like this. Only he can make you feel this good.
His eyes never leave yours the whole time, even when he starts to pick up the pace. Every twitch of your inner walls lets him know he’s doing something right, taking the opportunity to slide a finger in using his free hand. Now, he focusses his tongue on your clit, licking and sucking as his finger massages your inner walls. The way you’re clenching around him only makes him that much more eager to finally be inside you after all this time.
By now, multiple curses and moans of his name have slipped past your lips, whines only serving to becoming louder as he adds a second finger. Each movement he makes is precise, and you can feel the pressure building with each moment that passes by. With each flick of his tongue, you swear it will be the push you need to fall over the edge, but he purposely slows his movements, wanting to keep you on the brink for as long as possible and prolong your pleasure. By the time he adds a third finger, you feel as if you’re just about ready to fall apart.
“That’s it, darling,” he coaxes, moving his fingers along your inner walls in time with each flick of his tongue, the pressure within you about to snap. “Let yourself go.”
His words are all you need to hear in order to feel yourself falling over the edge, your orgasm crashing into you as a scream of his name tears from your throat. A smirk on his lips is the first thing you see once your vision clears, chest heaving with each breath you take as he laps up every last drop of your essence with his tongue.
“Such a good girl for me,” he hums, removing his fingers in order to crawl up your body and place them at your lips. “Suck.”
Immediately, you part your lips, taking his fingers into your mouth and tasting yourself on them. A moan bubbles in your throat as your tongue swirls around his digits, echoed only by his own groan as he sees the blissful expression on your features.
Taking his fingers out of your mouth, he kisses you once more, pulling your body impossibly closer to his own. He needs to feel every inch of you pressed against him, not wanting to leave any part of your body unexplored this evening.
“Jaehyun,” his name falling from your lips is one of the best sounds he’s ever heard in his life, and he could never tire of it. “Please, I need you.”
Those words are all it takes for him to be ripping off his pants and lining himself up with your entrance. He can’t help but tease you a bit, dipping the head of his cock into your folds to collect your wetness before pulling back out again just to hear you whine. You’re so cute when you’re needy for him.
“Don’t worry, baby, I’ll make you feel so good,” his voice is a low drawl that sounds right beside your ear.
Your arms are already wrapped around his torso, nails digging into the skin of his back as you feel the need to bring him closer. The next thing you hear is him let out a small chuckle, feeling him beginning to stretch you out in the next second as he begins to push into you.
Your mouth falls open in a soundless gasp as you feel him stretching you out. His own breath falters as he feels your walls pulsing around him, the soft warmth of your flesh feeling as if it were made for him. Considering the fact that you two fit perfectly together, he swears that’s the case.
He has to remind himself not to move before you’re okay, every instinct in his body screaming at him to ravish you as soon as he’s seated in you fully. However, he’s in no rush tonight, wanting to take his time in order to make the sweetest love to your body. Something only he can do.
As soon as he sees you nod, he’s resting his forehead against yours as he pulls out slightly and gives a shallow thrust to start. His movements are slow, precise, each movement of his hips a sensual grind to make you feel every inch of him buried within you.
“I fucking love you, you know that?” His voice is rough, strained as he attempts to control himself for the time being. This is your first time together, and he wants to make sure it’s special for the both of you, something neither of you will forget. 
You let out a gasp at a particularly sharp thrust, “I love you.”
This is all he could have ever wanted, and more, as he begins to pick up his pace. His lips meet yours once more in a searing kiss, all of his passion, love, lust, and want for you being conveyed wordlessly through every movement he makes.
When his lips aren’t on yours, they’re sucking marks into the skin of your neck, teeth nipping at the skin shortly after. As he increases his pace, his one hand comes up to grab yours, fingers intertwining as the other grips your waist, holding you to him as close as possible. The way your free hand drags down his back, nails biting into his skin lets him know he’s doing all the right things. Your legs wrapping around his waist only serve to pull him that much closer into you, a pleased rumble escaping his chest.
Shifting slightly, he adjusts the angle he’s hitting you at, hearing your sharp intake of breath as he hits a specific spot inside you.
“Fuck, my King, right there,” your voice is desperate as it comes out, eyes closing in bliss as your head is thrown back.
The snarl that tears from his throat is feral, your words snapping any last bits of sanity he had left in his body as his hips snap into yours. 
“That’s it, Darling,” he growls, eyes bleeding red once more as he takes in the beautiful expressions you’re making for him, “let your King take care of his Queen.”
The hitch in your breath at his own words causes a tightening in his abdomen, and he knows he’s getting close. He has to remind himself that you’re still only human as his grip tightens on your hand and waist, not wanting to hurt you, but needing you to feel just how desperate he is for you. Everything about you drives him insane, and he’ll be damned if he doesn’t treat you like the Queen you are.
With each thrust, he can feel your walls twitching around him, signalling that you’re getting closer to your second release of the night. Bringing his one hand down from your waist, he uses his thumb to circle your clit, feeling your whole body shudder beneath him as you near the edge.
“Come on, my Queen,” his chest rumbles in content each time he says those words, voice dangerously low. “Come with me. Come for your King.”
The way his thumb flicks at your clit, combined with his words and the angle he’s hitting inside of you is enough to push you over the edge for the second time that night. Seeing you shake beneath him in ecstasy, combined with the sinful way you’re moaning his name has him following shortly after, a loud cry of your own name escaping his lips.
Lazily thrusting into you a few more times as you both come down from your highs, he makes sure you’re okay before pulling out of you. In the blink of an eye, he’s got a damp washcloth ready in his hand, wiping you down gently while whispering soft praises in your ear, telling you how good you are for him, and how much he loves you. You can only smile softly in return, finally able to catch your breath once he returns from disposing of the washcloth.
Crawling into the bed, he tucks you both under the covers, pulling you close into his chest in the next moment. His hand strokes over your back gently as he places a tender kiss to your forehead.
“I love you,” he whispers. “My Queen.”
“And I love you,” you hum. “My King.”
Silence settles over the two of you as you each take comfort in the other’s embrace. Eventually, sleep overtakes you, leaving Jaehyun to watch over your sleeping figure with a smile on his face.
“Always and forever,” he whispers, allowing his eyes to close and his whole body to relax as he succumbs to his own darkness.
Dawn comes and Jaehyun manages to wake before you do, appreciating the way the morning light cascades over your naked form, painting you in golden hues for him to adore. His eyes trail over your back, tracing the curve of your spine as he remembers the events of last night. Licking his lips, he inhales the scents of the morning deeply, positively growling at the way you’re now covered in his scent.
As it should be. As it will always be. From this point onwards, you’re his and he’s yours, and last night serves as a confirmation of that fact. Now, you’ve given yourselves to each other, and all that’s left to do is set the date for the wedding.
A few minutes pass by with Jaehyun simply admiring you. Very lightly he traces his hand over your back, loving the way you shiver underneath his fingertips, for it only makes him recall how you were trembling beneath him in bliss merely hours before. He could stay like this with you forever, but unfortunately, he needs to attend to some final arrangements for the royal announcement of your wedding ceremony.
Letting out a small sigh, disappointed he has to leave you for the time being, he slides out of bed. The glint of the ring on your left hand in the morning light catches his gaze, only causing a small smile to form at his lips. Last night could not have been more perfect.
Moving as silently as he can so as not to disturb you, he exits your room.
It takes him longer than he would have liked to get ready that morning, his movements feeling a bit sluggish the more he has to move around. It’s almost as if his senses have dulled slightly for the time being, for his hearing isn’t as sharp as it usually is, nor his sense of smell. Perhaps these are simply side effects of his mood, for he knows when he’s overcome with emotions he can never think straight, let alone react in an orderly manner.
Making his way through the castle, he finally enters the throne room, having requested to meet Minho there to discuss everything that still needs to be done for the upcoming ceremonies. However, what he isn’t expecting to see is another person standing with their arms crossed in front of their chest beside a very nervous looking Minho.
“What is the meaning of this?” Jaehyun’s voice practically booms across the room, demanding their attention.
“Your Highness, I’ve been attempting to escort Miss Lori out of the castle and back to her home, but she simply will not go until she speaks with her older sister,” Minho explains, words coming out rushed as he looks towards Jaehyun frantically.
“Is there anything I can help you with? Your sister is currently still resting in her chambers,” Jaehyun continues to play the nice card. He’s gotten this far despite not needing anyone’s approval, but that still doesn’t mean he won’t try for you.
“Cut the bullshit, you’re not fooling me,” Lori narrows her eyes at him, only causing Jaehyun to raise his brows amusedly.
“Is there a reason that you’ve come to talk with your sister then?” Jaehyun asks, already bored with this conversation, yet still feigning interest and concern. Again, he’d do anything for you, even if it means something as trivial as this.
“I’ve come to collect my sister and take her back home,” Lori answers. “Away from you.”
Jaehyun’s expression falls, immediately darkening at the threat apparent in her voice, “I don’t think you understand the situation you’re in here.”
“No, I don’t think you understand your situation,” Lori counters, causing Minho to send her a look filled with nothing but distress. “I’ve seen through your little ‘nice guy’ act long ago thanks to your mother, and I’ve finally come to save my sister from whatever you plan to do to her. She’ll listen to me this time, she always has. I’m taking my sister back home with me, and there’s nothing you can do to stop me.”
The confidence in which she says those words irritate Jaehyun to no end. Though, he supposes he finds this situation rather ironic, causing him to let out a few laughs in disbelief. How dare Lori threaten him of all people. Like she could ever do anything to tear the two of you apart now, considering what occurred last night. After all, the two of you are to be bonded for life.
“You came all this way to threaten me? Me, of all people?” He chuckles maliciously, shaking his head in disbelief. “You think I’m just going to let you waltz in here and steal what rightfully belongs to me? That I’d even let you near what’s mine?”
“Your threats don’t scare me, I know you won’t do anything to me,” Lori raises her chin in the air in defiance, a smug look resting on her face. Clearly the letters his mother had sent her are still giving her a false confidence on this matter.
In a flash, he’s in front of her, holding her in the air by her neck. The hold his hand has around her throat is firm enough for it to be a threat, but not hard enough to completely block her airway just yet. “You underestimate the lengths I am willing to go to keep what is mine. I’ve spent too long planning everything out and making sure things run smoothly in order for things to get where they are now. I’m not giving my love up so easily.”
“Then, obviously you wouldn’t harm her own sister!” She manages to choke out, gaze darting off to his right as if something, or someone has caught her eye. His grip only serves to tighten ever so slightly as his eyes flash red.
“Wouldn’t I?” He hums, tilting his head in false sympathy. “I mean, considering I disposed of my own mother who got in the way, what’s a measly little human girl compared to that?”
Minho can do nothing but watch as this event unfolds before his very eyes, taking a few steps back in order to give the Prince space to do what he has to. His own heart is pounding in his chest out of fear, so he can only imagine how Lori feels in this very moment.
“It’d be so easy for me to cover up your death, so don’t flatter yourself,” Jaehyun seethes, eyes crazed as he stares into hers. “I’ve done everything I can to rid myself of nuisances in my way. So, what’s one more?”
Shifting his predatory gaze, he locks eyes with Minho, waiting for the advisor to speak and confirm his words.
“Yes, Your highness, you’re correct,” Minho swallows nervously, he’s never seen Jaehyun like this before. The intense insanity in his eyes nearly has Minho stumbling over his own feet despite standing perfectly still. He knows something must have happened last night after the engagement party, otherwise there’s no way he would be looking like that right now.
“You’re nothing,” he hisses. “A measly little human whose life will end at the flick of my wrist, worth no more that the servants I’ve killed beneath my feet. Poor Greta, only wanted to warn the love of my life about me, and look what that got her,” he feigns a pout, “only her throat ripped out.”
Lori gasps, remembering how you mentioned to her that one of the servants you met on one of your first days here seemed to have suddenly disappeared, never to be seen again.
“Not to mention the countless other lives I’ve taken for even looking at my love the wrong way. Or maybe, perhaps I should say poor Ben, who only got his skull run through for providing the wrong information about my love’s favourite foods,” Jaehyun tuts, shaking his head. “Bastard could have ruined everything. Just as you are trying to do.”
Lori can feel the breath being squeezed out of her lungs as Jaehyun slowly crushes her airway. She attempts to claw at the hands around her neck to no avail, legs kicking out uselessly beneath her. 
“Don’t you ever think for one second I’d let you take away what I’ve worked so hard to achieve,” he spits, venom dripping from every syllable as he crushes her throat, bringing his other hand up and tearing her head off in the next moment in his anger. “Worthless scum.”
Lori’s head hits the floor with a loud thump, her blood pooling around her now discarded body as lifeless eyes stare up at Jaehyun in fear. He shakes his head in disgust, pulling out a handkerchief to wipe off the blood that had managed to get on his hands. 
“Clean this up,” he orders, turning to Minho to see him nod once in understanding.
Closing his eyes, he shakes his head. So much for his pleasant morning. 
Turning around, Jaehyun sighs, eyes still closed. His face is still contorted into an expression of annoyance, brow furrowed as he takes a deep breath. He can feel his whole body tense as he recognizes a familiar faint scent in the air.
Slowly, he opens his eyes, realizing in horror that you stand in the open doorway of the throne room. Your hands are both raised over your mouth, as if to cover a silent scream as tears stream down your face. He can feel his dead heart falter in his chest as he watches you. The fear you look at him with is something he never ever wanted to see from you, especially directed towards himself.
A few moments pass by with the two of you just silently observing the other. Jaehyun hates how it’s only now that he can seemingly hear the loudness of your racing heart, your scent becoming stronger the more time you spend staring at one another. All that he had worked so hard to create, everything he’s done to impress you, to woo you and make you fall in love with him, is now ruined. It’s only all confirmed when he sees you turn and attempt to run away from him.
In an instant, he’s run to you, caging you in his arms and holding you tightly. Your screams and protests are falling on deaf ears as he holds you to his chest. His attempts to quietly shush you and calm you down are not working, with you only seeming to struggle harder against him, spouting insults and curses at him. 
“Sweetheart, please,” he sighs, “I need you to calm down.”
“Calm down?” You’re hysterical at this point. “Calm down? You just murdered my little sister in front of my very eyes and you have the audacity to tell me to calm down?”
“I did it for us,” he replies calmly, voice sounding completely opposite to how he really feels inside at the moment. “She would have only gotten in the way.”
He’s not entirely sure how you managed to sneak up on him, but he assumes that he didn’t hear you due to his dull senses this morning. The fact that you’re covered in his scent is probably why he didn’t smell you right away, too. Either way, he’ll do his best to steer the conversation in a direction which suits him, considering he doesn’t exactly know how long you had been standing there for. However, your next words only serve to confirm just how long you had.
“And I suppose your mother, Greta, Ben, and who knows who else were all collateral, too?” You retort, anger and disgust shining in your eyes which only causes his grip to tighten ever so slightly around you.
“Yes,” he answers, but he isn’t stupid enough to believe you’ll willingly accept his reasonings. “They were. I don’t expect you to understand why I’ve done what I have yet, but if you think I’m ever going to let you go, you’re mistaken. And before you say you hate me, I just want you to think back on everything I’ve ever done for you since you’ve been here. I want you to remember all the moments we’ve shared together, especially the good ones. Especially last night,” a shiver runs down your spine as he whispers those words lowly in your ear before trailing his lips down your neck, pressing them against the same spot he did the previous evening. Your struggling lessens as he continues, “I’d never do anything to harm you, I think my actions towards you have shown that. I never wanted you to be scared of me. Why do you think I never showed you this side of me yet?”
“You really are a devil,” you spit, finally giving up your attempts to escape his hold for you know that it’s futile at this point. You’ve long been trapped in his clutches, you just only wish you’d realized it sooner.
“A devil who loves you,” he hums, nuzzling his face deeper into your neck and breathing in your combined scents. A shiver goes down his spine. At least now he doesn’t have to worry about hiding this side of himself from you any longer. Plus, you now know what he’s capable of; what he’s willing to do for you. What he’s always been willing to do for you. “I always get what I want, so don’t even think about leaving me. You sealed your fate the moment you agreed to become mine.”
“I hate you,”
He simply chuckles, “that’s not what you were saying last night.”
“Yeah, well, things change,” you reply, refusing to so much as look in his direction as he holds you from behind.
“That they do,” he hums once more, clearly amused by your stubbornness. In the next moment, his eyes are going dark, expression deadly serious as he turns you around to stare deeply into your eyes. A shiver goes down your spine. “One thing that hasn’t changed though, is the fact that whether you like it or not, you can never escape me. I love you, and I will always love you, so you better get used to that. After all, a King should never be without his Queen.”
2K notes · View notes
wizkiddx · 3 years ago
Text
living and reviving II
yep when I said three parts I think I meant 4 oops
summary: an overdue conversation that has to happen - like it or not
warnings: cheating, swearing, pregnancy talk, lots more angst, think thats it?
tomhollandxreader
/////////////////////// prev
So with a new sense of dread and fear and complete and total isolation you uttered three single words before hysterically running away.
“Don’t follow me.”
Not now, not ever.
That had been three weeks ago.
And it still fucking hurt like hell.
It had ended up that Yamna had taken you back to hers, where you had stayed for a couple nights. During that couple of days, Tom had tried. He had tried to apologise, tried to explain, tried to fix things. But it just wasn’t that easy.
Whatever he said, it didn’t take back from the fact that he had in that moment meant it. So no amount of sorrys could ever take that back.
After everyone had realised just how serious their situation was, Tom had moved out of your shared flat - so you could at least be in the place you were comfortable. Afterall the nursery was built in your flat and clearly it was you doing all the baby stuff for the moment. Thankfully Yamna, having been cut loose so without job, offered to move in with you. Which was probably the only thing keeping you going.
Well, that and ben and jerrys ‘phish food’. Honestly the shop must think you’re running some sort of ice cream black market at the rate you’re getting through their tubs.
Everyone kept parroting that it wasn’t good for the baby. Too much ice cream . Too much heavy lifting. Too much stress.
And yes, it probably was. But that was out of your control . The stress and lack of man in the household meant you had to do the heavy lifting of shopping from the car up the stairs. Shopping meaning ice cream, which you only depended on so much because of the stress.
It was a vicious cycle of hell.
Even Yamna, the person you were relying on keeping you sane had started walking on eggshells. It was as though you were literally about to pop, she always had to have at least half an eye on you. You were even banned from locking the toilet door - just in case.
It felt like you were a captive animal, people kept coming to observe you, giving sad looks before gleeing the scene.
You hadn’t been sleeping well either. Of course, being 3 weeks of your due date didn’t help - but neither did the lack of Tom. In fact, for the first time since shit had hit the fan, you had actually been managing to get some decent sleep when Yamna knocked on your bedroom door, quietly calling your name.
“I’m asleep” Groaning, you pulled the covers further over your head, praying to god that she’d leave you alone. But of course that wasn’t happening, she just lightly chuckled before you felt the bed dip - she had perched on the edge… Toms side.
“You never normally sleep talk.”
“I’m never normally this sleep deprived.” She sighed, whilst you still stubbornly kept your eyes closed.
“I’m sorry I woke you…. but this is important.”
“What?” Almost grunting, you threw the covers down looking up at her in anticipation. That was another thing about pregnancy - you were always on high alert, always worried.
“Toms here.”
“Tell him to f off.” Quickly you stopped caring about what your bestmate had to say.
“He’s saying that he’s the little ones dad and that he deserves to be involved and…. and I think I might agree.”
“I deserve a boyfriend who stays loyal to me so clearly neither of us are getting what we want.” You weren’t angry at Yamna and snapping at her wasn’t the answer. And yet you still did it.
“Y/n….I love you and I am completely on your side. I just think that maybe, perhaps, you should at least manage to be civil before baby arrives. Otherwise… thats going to be a lot to deal with all at once.”
It was your turn to sigh, deep and heavy (or at least as deep as the baby let). Most infuriatingly she was right. The conversation had to happen at some point. With a baby there too it would only be even more traumatic.
“He’s here now?” It only dawned on you how broken you actually sounded when the words croaked out of you.
“Yeh hunny… I didn’t let him inside so he’s standing outside the door looking like a dickhead right now.” The image cheered you up a little, enough to sit up in bed and be wrapped in Yamna’s arms. Her actions said it all, she really only meant the best for you and knew how hard this would be. After a moment she leant back. “I almost considered calling the paps so they could get a picture and label him as a groveling dick.”
“You should of.” Of course you didn’t mean it, but the answer had you both laughing. It took a minute to calm down before she changed subject slightly.
“You want me to make myself scarce? I can hide in my room or go to the shops or-“
“Text the guy from the bar - you deserve a night off ‘babysitting Y/n’ duties.”
“I’m not babys-“
“Yes you are. Go out with him and have some fun, I’ll be fine.”
“You sure?”
“Yeh”
That was a bare face lie - but Yamna had been almost too good to you. She really really needed a break. Especially as the current plan was she’d be helping with the newborn too. Right now you wouldn’t have wished a baby on yourself - never mind your best mate.
“Okay, get ready then babe - but do it slowly, leave him waiting outside in the cold for as long as possible.”
“Obviously.” You laughed, hauling yourself out of bed, where she gave you one more encouraging hug before leaving.
After hearing Yamna leave, and brushing your hair and throwing on a new pair of trakkies and hoodie, you slowly walked towards the door. It felt as though impending doom were on the other side and every fibre of you wanted to scream and run the other way. But it just had to happen at some point. Why not now?
With a final sharp exhale, attempting to pull yourself together, you opened the door. Immediately your heart sank, seeing nothing. Had you really been that long? And even so, was a 10 minute wait enough for him to give up? You could already feel the hormonal pregnancy tears starting to spring, when a grunt drew your attention.
What you hadn’t considered was the fact Tom was ready to camp out, sitting on the floor beside your door. Springing to his feet, he seemed shocked you’d actually opened the door - makes two of you. When Yamna left she had told him you were coming, but seeing really is believing.
“Y/n! I-I… I wasn’t sure you were ever going to answer.”
“You and me both.” You replied dryly, still leaning on the door. “Do you er…. do you want to come in?” Again he seemed shocked, as though he wasn’t sure you meant it.
“Is that-that okay?” Shrugging you just nodded, stepping back so he could get in. He did pay half the mortgage afterall.
“You want a drink?” He quickly declined your offer, not vocally but instead rushing past you to the kitchen and turning the kettle on himself.
“Your the pregnant one. Go chill on the sofa, I’ll bring you a cuppa.”
And a bit taken a back by his forcefulness you followed instructions, from the sofa watching how effortlessly he danced round the kitchen. It wasn’t shocking, it was technically his kitchen too. But seeing him there felt so alien, almost transporting you back to much much simpler times. Seemed a lifetime ago.
After a couple of minutes, he rounded the sofa with a hot chocolate in one hand for you (because caffiene is bad for the baby) and a cup of Yorkshire tea in the other.
“So… how have you been?”
“Ate a lot of ben and jerrys” You answered without really answering, except he knew you all too well.
“That bad?” He sighed, scrubbing a hand over his brow “how about the baby?”
“I don’t tend to carry an ultrasound on me but she’s been keeping me up all night kicking - so normal I guess.”
“Thats good” He spoke before realising what he said. “Sorry no I um-I don’t mean it like that!” You all but laughed in the face of his flusteredness, only making the tips of his ears go pinker.
“I assume you had something to say and that you came here for a reason rather than just pity me?”
“I want to make things right Y/n - I-I mean your having my kid.”
“OUR kid”
“ Exactly! And-and I love you too and-“
“Bullshit” You may have murmured it under your breath but you had intended for him to hear.
“Oh come one Y/n, you know that!”
It was like the man was asking to be yelled at.
“Don’t sit there trying to patronise me! I THOUGHT i knew it but then I saw you all over another girl. So yes, I’m calling bullshit.”
“Ugh I… If your not going to even try to hear me out then…”
“Then what Tom? You gonna kick me out. I mean this is your flat after all! Maybe you’d like to dump the mother of your unborn child homeless on the street and forget about us - how’d that sound? I’m sure your fans would blindly applaud you.”
“Listen! Please would you just listen to me.” His voice was loud and tone harsh, making you flinch a little. Not because you were ever worried he’d hurt you - but how this wave of uncomfort shuddered through your body, baby even squirming in discontent. So focused on that you just nodded, shifting back into the sofa.
Tom had noticed your reaction and seeing you seemingly scared of him like that, well it broke his heart. Even more.
“Sorry I didn’t mean to shout, I just…. I really need to try and fix this.” He leaned closer, letting out a thankful breath when you just nodded, as if to say go on.
“I’ve really really missed you… these past couple of weeks I’ve never felt so gulity in my life. Not because of what I did! Well yeh that but-but more how much it hurt you and-“
“Fuck.”
You couldn’t help but let out that little curse of pain as a new wave of pain, which seemed to originate from your lower back, shuddered through you. Tom looked up from where his eyes had been nervously wringing his palms whilst he spoke. Rubbing a hand over your belly you shook your head and motioned for him to continue.
She was just kicking really really hard. Right?
“Uhm yeh so I just wanted to properly tell you everything that happened that night so at least we are on the same page? A-And I’m not going to try and use this an excuse but I had been drinking so-“
Seemingly baby disliked the end of that sentence too, causing another rippling wave to echo through your body, feeling as though a band was pressing tightly round your stomach. With another small curse it forced you to stand up, in the hope that’d ease her. Clearly she was as done with his shit as you were.
“Need a water.” You muttered, already waddling to the kitchen, where you heard Tom follow you immediately - like an inpatient dog.
“Y/n sit down I can-“
He was silenced by you freezing and grabbing his arm tightly - a physical contact he hadn’t been expecting from you.
“Tom… get your phone.” You spoke slowly, still not having dared to have moved an inch - fingers almost white from how tightly you were squeezing his forearm.
“Wha-are you-are you okay?”
“I think my waters just broke. Get the phone. Now.”
~~~ feedback is really appreciated + would love to know what u think as still in the process of writing so can be guided / helped by asks !!! ~~~
taglist: @maraudersandco @@minejungwoo @sippin-on-tea @thegirlintheswivelchair @lovehollandy12 @hollandlover19 @thefernandasantana @hunnybunimdun @hallecarey1@cedricdiggorysimpp @msmimimerton @hollandfanficlove @pandaxnienke @crossyourpeter @thegirlwiththeimpala @tom-softie @sunwardsss @spiitfiiires @radcloudenthusiast @ladykxxx08 @prancerrparkerr @wildxwidow @arctic-monkcys @ownbauer13 @tomhollandlol @marvelsbitch8 @peterr-parkourr @lizzyclifford13-blog @user1683 @elishi03
345 notes · View notes
shurisneakers · 4 years ago
Text
harmless (iv)
Summary: Bucky volunteers to go stop a small time villain, but nothing can prepare him for what exactly he has to deal with. (Bucky x villain!reader, drabble series)
Warnings: cursing, guns, mention of war, frustrated bucky, dramatic reader
Word count: 1.5k
A/N: good evening i’ve never been to any of the places i mention in this series so dont come @ me
if you have any ideas for future inventions/evil plans, lemme know! i might actually end up using them 
here’s my ko-fi if you’d like to support my writing <333
Tumblr media
Previous Part || Series Masterlist
He spends the weekend doing nothing. It’s supposed to be relaxing. He finds it nauseatingly boring.
“No mini mission this week?” Steve asks him from across the couch. 
They’re supposed to be catching up on Star Wars but two prequels in and Bucky could feel himself lose his sanity. Anyone could present him with a random assortment of alphabets, call it a Star Wars species and he would have no reason not to believe them.
It’s not like he doesn’t like space. It’s just that he’s had enough of it and everything and everyone who came from it for the foreseeable future.
“No. Someone else is taking care of it.”
“Didn’t you volunteer for this?”
“I pulled myself out of the case.”
“I thought you were having fun.” 
Bucky’s head slowly turns to look at him. “Why would you think that?”
“I don’t know,” Steve shrugged. “Looked like you were.”
Well, he wasn’t. He likes it here at home, glued to the TV. Popcorn beside him, sweatpants on. Refreshing, calming, slow, mundane, and Jesus Christ, so fucking boring-
His spiralling is interrupted by the dinging of the elevator to the common floor. No one was allowed up there unless it was extremely urgent. Guests were barely allowed into the Tower as it was. 
It reveals the receptionist from downstairs, Marie. She’s always a little reserved, a little shy. But Bucky had seen her chew and spit out trespassers or anyone who dared to get on her nerve. He adores her.
“Hey, Marie,” Steve says while Bucky sends her a friendly wave in greeting. “What’s wrong?”
“There’s a hostage situation downtown,” she informs them. 
“Okay...” Steve drawls, waiting for a reason why this was an Avengers level threat.
“They’ve asked for Mr. Barnes by name.” She makes a mention towards him.
Bucky sits up straight. Bits of popcorn fall off his chest. 
“What?”
“They said, and I quote-” she looks down at her notepad. “‘Tell that grumpy motherfucker that I’m waiting for him and that he’s not getting out of this so easily because we have come too far.’ End quote. They’ve also told me to include a kissing emoji. And a skull.”
Steve and he look at each other.
“Well?” Steve prods. 
Bucky sighs and gets up to go get ready.
The entrance of Chuck E. Cheese is more crowded than he’d ever seen. He wasn’t even sure he’d seen people in the store before. If there were, they probably only came up till his waist. 
There are a few journalists, a few policemen standing together outside. Whispers of confusion and curiosity reigned free. 
Bucky gently pushes his way to the front. He gets a nod from a police officer who opens the door for him after a quick briefing. 
The place is darker than it usually would be. A trademark, it seemed. The blinds are drawn shut and most of the light is coming through whatever sneaks in through the crack. 
“Hey, Barnes.” Your voice is muffled by a mask that looks suspiciously like it was made out of classroom craft supplies.
There’s a person in a loose chokehold in your hand with a gun pressed against his head. Once again it looks straight out of a cartoon, purple with round disks lining its barrel. 
“What’s all this now?” He gestures around monotonously. 
“A hostage situation. Didn’t you get the memo?”
“Got that part down, genius,” he bites back. “But why?”
“Fucker kept harassing me when I was walkin’ down the street.” 
The guy’s helpless gaze met Bucky. 
“Catcalling me, stalking me.” You tighten the grip you have on him. “Call me darlin’ one more time, you son of a bitch. I dare you.”
He wasn’t impressed with his pleading eyes. He kinda felt like he deserved it. 
“Why’d you do it here?” The bright colours were starting to give him a heading. “And where are the staff?”
“It’s symbolic, Bucky,” you emphasise, “He deserves to be among other rat bastards.”
Of course.
“The staff?” he asks again. 
“Gave them thirty bucks and told them to leave. I’m not a monster.”
“Right.” He doesn’t bother refuting you. “Why’d you call me here?”
“Dunno.” You shrug. “Thought it’d be fun. You having fun yet?”
You shake the guy you’re holding. He gives a small whimper. 
Bucky doesn’t want to stop you. He had chugged enough Respect Juice in his lifetime to know that this guy probably deserved a threat or two.
Hell, he’d even help but you were more than capable of handling this on your own.
“Listen,” he sighed. “As much as I’m sure he deserves it, this is technically illegal and I’m required to stop you.”
“Sorry sarge, I thought you weren’t interested in playing this stupid game with me,” you mock, voice dropping to imitate him.
“I’m not.” It wasn’t entirely true. One Saturday with Jar Jar Binks had convinced him otherwise.
“Okay, so before you leave, do me a favour and call Hawkeye. I hear he looks mighty fine when he’s annoyed.”
His face involuntarily scrunched up. You were going to replace him with Clint? Clint?
He probably took it more as an insult than he should have.
“I’m not doing that.” Bless his foul mouthed friend, but he was a little shit who was too sarcastic for his own good. At least twice a week he’d say something stupid to Bucky and then take out his hearing aids when he tried to argue back. 
“You’re leavin’ me with no options here,” you groaned, using your thumb to flip a switch. The gun looks like it powered up, lights along the side turning red.
If he let you have this, it’d be a bad look for the Avengers.
New York man dies in Chuck E. Cheese lone hostage situation, unable to be saved by same superhero who tried to fight Thanos with a machine gun.
“Tell ya what,” he says instead, “If you kill him, there won’t even be a slight chance that you’ll see me again.”
Your grip on the gun falters.
“If I let him go...”
“I might consider coming back next week.” He’s trying to spin it, make it look like he’s the one with the upper hand here. “But you gotta let him go.”
You search his face for any signs of dishonesty.
“Let him go or you’ll never see me again.” It sounds too much like Clint’s arguments with his dog who brought a live squirrel into the house. 
“Fine,” you relent, a glint in your eye. “but say goodbye to this fuckface.”
Before Bucky can open his mouth to shout in protest, you pull the trigger. The man clenches his eyes shut, face red.
He expects blood to be splatter across his face.
Nothing happens.
A barrage of bubbles floats into the room.
“I meant it literally,” you say, pushing him off you. “Say goodbye. He’s leaving.”
The man stumbles to the ground and Bucky doesn’t make any attempt to catch him. He scrambles to his knees, picking himself up and scurrying out the door to a hoard of reporters.
The door shuts behind him with the chime of a bell.
“You’re annoying,” Bucky states, giving a small sigh.
“I’m well aware of that.” You pull off the mask, wiping the sweat off your brow.
“Where is the agent assigned to your case?” 
“Dunno. Last I saw he was crying on the driveway of my lair. I just figured he’d pick himself up later so I left him there.”
Bucky’s nose twitches. 
“You weren’t actually going to kill him, were you.” He shrugs with his shoulder towards the door. It wasn’t a question, more a statement. He knew you wouldn’t. 
“I could have.”
“But you weren’t going to,” he repeats. 
“No,” you admit. “I wasn’t. But I’m glad to see you showed up.”
“You held someone hostage as leverage.”
“No, no. I held someone hostage and then asked to see you. They were completely unrelated.”
“You’re evil.”
“You jumped to conclusions,” you point out. “Would you like a trampoline next time? Maybe a pogo stick, you clown?”
He has a very real gun in his holster. His very real metal death arm aches to use it. 
“No one else agreed to come,” he deflects. 
“We both know that’s a lie. You were going to come back anyway.” You stuff the bubble gun back into the bag. “I’m deliciously irresistible.”
“I beg to differ.”
“Then beg.” You give him a smirk and he rolls his eyes. “Don’t worry, you win this round, sarge.”
He doesn’t say anything. He watches you remove your heist gear, revealing normal civilian clothes underneath.
You walk casually to the kitchen, intending to leave through the back door.
“But I can’t say I lost either.” You send him a wink before swiftly pushing open the door and leaving him behind.
He only watches you leave.
It doesn’t hit him until a few seconds later that he let a criminal out of his hands when there were several policemen and journalists outside.
He entertains the idea of chasing you down and handing you over. 
It takes him only a few seconds to decide that if they wanted you, they’d have to try themselves.
Next part 
981 notes · View notes
heyiwrotesomethings · 4 years ago
Text
It’s Been Too Long
Shinobu Kochou x She/Her Reader
A/N: Alright Shinobu Community, take a fuckin’ sip babes. It’s kind of a long one. My brain was like, friends to enemies to friends to lovers? To which I replied, this is going to be simultaneously too long and too short. I love me some slow burn but also I can’t justify putting that much time into something like this lol. While writing this I learned that one becomes a Hashira by killing a demon moon OR killing at least fifty demons. I didn't know that before, but I was in too deep to fix things. Y’all are a Kinoe rank that probably should be a Hashira given how much slaying you’ve done, sorry! As far as warnings go, I think we’re good. Unless fighting and misunderstandings aren’t your thing. It’ll all be better in the end though!  Word Count: 15,088 
The estate was dark and bleak. It had rained for nearly a week straight, the patter of water against the solid structure of the tiled roof was a near constant companion to the blank static of despair that clouded everyone’s minds.
Kochou Kanae had died of lethal injuries bequeathed to her by a high ranking demon who had left her to bleed out as the sun made its appearance. Perhaps if it had risen even just a few minutes prior, she could have evaded such a cruel fate.
Shinobu had found her of course, the world is just that cruel, or perhaps kind in giving her sister that closure, to be able to see her one last time before she took her last gurgling breath.
It was appropriate, the rain. After the funeral it was a temporary reminder of the warmth that had been reaped from the estate, never to be felt again in this lifetime. Not that (Y/n), Kanao, Aoi, or the youngest residents of the estate needed a reminder. Shinobu certainly didn’t either.
“Shinobu, you didn’t come to dinner. Please try to eat something.” (Y/n) coaxed, sliding the door open. The only light came from a small lantern inside the swirling gloom of the room, highlighting Shinobu hunched over her desk with her head in her hands. “Shinobu?”
“It’s only been a week.” (Y/n) strained to hear the taut whisper of the girl who had grown to be her closest friend. The girl who had given her a second chance at life when she had nowhere else to go. It hurt to hear her sound so broken. “It feels like time is standing still and going too fast at the same time.”
(Y/n) set the light meal in front of Shinobu and leaned against the desk, the wood creaked slightly as she did so. “I know what you mean. I feel the same.”
It wasn’t the first time they’ve talked like this. To be survivors of such unthinkable atrocities, one could go crazy keeping it all locked inside. The guilt, fear, helplessness... sometimes the memories played on loop night after night, waking up to the screams in their minds making sick harmonies with their own.
“I don’t know what I’m supposed to do.” Shinobu spoke tentatively after a moment of drizzling static tapping against the roof. She raised herself just enough to wrestle a paper out from under her arms and slid it to (Y/n). “Oyakata-sama has sent me a summons to meet with him and the Hashira. He intends for me to take,” Shinobu’s voice grew tighter and she could not bring herself to finish, instead a painful sounding intake of air was all that was audible.
(Y/n) took the paper, holding it close to her face as she squinted, the dull light of the lantern made the letter a bit difficult to read, but the message was clear.
“He wants you to take her place.” (Y/n) frowned, a pained gleam pricked at the corners of her eyes.
“It’s been too long, but yet, not long enough,” Shinobu’s fists tightened, “I know the world hasn’t stopped spinning, demons haven’t stopped killing, but why do they want to replace her so quickly? Why are they willing to toss her aside? I don’t...”
“Shinobu,”
Shinobu finally looked up at (Y/n), angry and mournful tears tracked down her face, “I’m not my sister, I’m not Hashira material. I can’t fill the hole she left, (Y/n)!”
(Y/n) abandoned her perch on the desk to crouch beside Shinobu, enveloping her in her arms. Shinobu tightly grasped her back, watery gasps and sharp inhales fell from her lips as she tried to gain control of her breathing once more.
“Oyakata-sama knows you aren’t Kanae. You’re strong in your own right, Shinobu. He wouldn’t breach the subject if he didn’t think you could succeed by your own merits.”
“I have to keep the estate in order, the infirmary, the girls... I can’t take all this responsibility—“
“You don’t have to,” (Y/n) cut her off, the words came a bit sharper than she meant them too, “you’re not alone Shinobu. We can all have our own parts to play. You don’t have to shoulder this all by yourself.”
“Thank you.” Shinobu’s voice cracked.
They had stayed up well into the night. They hardly talked, the two young girls sat huddled together, holding each other tightly. No matter how much they’ve been hurt, time continues moving forward. Just because a boat has been shredded against a reef, that doesn’t mean the waves will grant reprieve from their assault. No, one is expected to keep swimming or to swallow the salty brine and drown. The Butterfly Estate’s allotted time for grief had passed. Now they were being given the not so subtle command that it was time to get back to work.
***
“I wish you could come with me.” Shinobu said the next morning as she sat on the engawa to put on her shoes. “Even if they made you wait outside I would feel a bit better.”
“You’ll be okay, we’ll be thinking about you all day and waiting for you to come back home.” (Y/n) assured, resting her hand on Shinobu’s back. She was almost afraid to touch the haori Shinobu now adorned, as if her hand would pass right through the material.
(Y/n) was surprised when she saw Shinobu wearing it instead of her usual short white haori, though she supposed there was comfort in holding this piece of her sister close. Perhaps the butterfly patterned haori could comfort Shinobu where (Y/n) and the others could not.
(Y/n) must have been staring too long because Shinobu leaned away from her hand, catching it with her own before (Y/n) could withdraw it completely. Shinobu squeezed the hand a moment, (Y/n) swore her heart froze upon seeing the ghostly smile painted over Shinobu’s lips.
“You’re right. No point in fretting over it, is there?”
“...Right,” (Y/n) blinked, “yeah. You’re going to do great.” (Y/n) managed a smile in return but she could feel the corner of her lips tremble at the effort. She wasn’t sure why, but this smile Shinobu was sporting sent chills down her spine.
“I’ll be off then,” Shinobu stood, releasing (Y/n)’s hand as she stepped away from the engawa, “Do make sure to keep everything in order while I’m away.”
“Of course!” (Y/n) winced at her own volume and Shinobu exhaled a quiet chuckle before turning away to make her way down the path. (Y/n) watched until the haunting haori could no longer be seen between the wisteria trees.
***
It was rather late when Shinobu returned. (Y/n) had just helped the youngest girls of the estate get ready for bed and was heading to the kitchens to prepare some tea to help her sleep. She had jumped in her skin when she saw the back of the butterfly patterned haori in the dim lantern light. Shinobu turned at the sound and sent a small, tired smile (Y/n)’s way.
“I thought I’d catch you here before you turned in for the night.” Shinobu spoke. “You almost always take a cup of tea to bed. I hope you don’t mind having some of what I’ve already prepared.”
It wasn’t the first time Shinobu caught her going to the kitchen to make tea. Though usually it was much later in the dead of night when nightmares and grief kept sleep at bay. (Y/n) wasn’t sure what kind of leaves or brewing Shinobu did, but her tea always managed to knock (Y/n) out cold into deep, dreamless bliss. Something about the way Shinobu was speaking was rubbing (Y/n) the wrong way however. There was none of the familiar attitude. The bashful bitterness that came with the sweetness of the tea. (Y/n) decided to shake it off and returned Shinobu’s tired smile. It would take time for things to seem normal again.
“You know me too well. Thank you.” (Y/n) graciously took the cup, relishing in the cup’s warmth and the relaxing scent that wafted off of the steam. “How did today go?”
“It was... fine.” Shinobu’s smile faltered and she quickly disguised it by sipping her own tea. “I’m officially a Hashira. Insect Pillar Kochou Shinobu.”
“It has a nice ring to it.” (Y/n) put in after a moment’s consideration hidden behind the guise of her clearing her throat. She didn’t know if a ‘congratulations’ would be what Shinobu would want to hear give the circumstances that led up to her new title.
“And how was holding down the fort?” Shinobu asked. It seemed she wanted to shift the topic of conversation away from herself. Not that (Y/n) could blame her.
“Everything went smoothly. Well, Aoi did get a bit aggravated with Kanao about one of her coin decisions but we worked it out. Sumi, Kiyo and Naho are picking up the recovery training lessons quickly and are doing very well. The Kakushi have been taking great care of the infirmary. All patients were still stable last I checked in.” (Y/n) reported.
“Thank you for keeping up with all of that.”
“I have to pull my weight around here somehow.” (Y/n) replied, hiding a yawn behind one hand.
“It’s getting late. You should get to bed before the tea kicks in any further.” Shinobu said, putting her own cup down.
“Aren’t you getting tired too?”
“I made myself a different brew, actually. I’ve got more work to do.” Shinobu allowed herself a little sly smile at the tiny frown (Y/n) wore as she looked into her own empty cup as if it had betrayed her somehow.
“Well, don’t forget you need to sleep too. Don’t overwork yourself.”
“Goodnight, (Y/n).” Shinobu called over her shoulder. She was already walking out of the kitchen.
“I mean it Shinobu. Promise me you’ll sleep tonight.” (Y/n) gently demanded, slipping into the hall to fall in step beside Shinobu.
“I’ll promise to try. Is that acceptable?” Shinobu asked, a bit of familiar snark came through and it made (Y/n) relax a bit and nod.
“Alright. Goodnight, Shinobu.”
At the end of the hall they broke off in different directions. Shinobu to the lab and (Y/n) to her room.
***
(Y/n) went through most of her morning routine before going out of her way to find the newly appointed Hashira. She hadn’t seen her since they parted last night. (Y/n) groaned inwardly, already assuming she’d find the young scientist still balancing equations and mixing beakers.
(Y/n) adjusted her butterfly hairpin before knocking her knuckles against the door, waiting for a reply.
“Shinobu?” (Y/n) had called out after another knock led to no reply. (Y/n) frowned and slid the door open of her own volition, closing it behind her once she was inside. It didn’t take long for her to find the exhausted girl hunched over an array of papers, dead asleep.
“When I told you to go to sleep last night, I had your own bed in mind, not a desk.” (Y/n) sighed quietly.
(Y/n) startled at another knock at the door.
“Who is it?” She asked, keeping her voice soft as to not disturb Shinobu.
“It’s Hayato, miss.” The muffled voice called. Ah, one of the Kakushi. “Kochou-sama has guests to attend to.”
“Set them up in the garden with tea, please. Kochou-sama will meet them just as soon as she finishes these papers.” (Y/n) said. It would not do to have news of the young master of the estate sleeping so late in the morning, and at her desk no less.
The Kakushi dismissed himself to carry out his orders and (Y/n)’ shoulders relaxed as his footprints faded down the hall. (Y/n) didn’t want to wake Shinobu, but if her presence was required, then the meeting must be important.
“Hey, Shinobu,” (Y/n) called softly, gently shaking Shinobu’s shoulders, “you have guests that need to see you.”
Shinobu managed to curl further into herself, mumbling a few curses under her breath that (Y/n) couldn’t help but giggle at.
“Maybe you’d feel better if you had actually gone to bed instead of passing out like this.”
“Who is it, what do they need?” Shinobu grumped, sitting up to stretch her abused spine.
“I’m not sure. A Kakushi came by to tell you about them. I asked him to set them up in the garden with tea.”
“Thank you for taking care of that,” Shinobu rubbed her eyes and stood, her chair scratching against the floor, “I should get going then.”
“Let me fix your hair quick at least.” (Y/n) said, already freeing Shinobu of her own butterfly clip. “Hold still.”
“It’s a little hard when you keep tugging your fingers through my hair.” Shinobu winced.
“Sorry, just a second.” (Y/n) spoke around the butterfly wing that she held between her lips as her fingers worked to gather Shinobu’s hair. Once Shinobu’s hair was neatly clipped back into place, (Y/n) circled her and smoothed out the wrinkles in Shinobu’s clothes the best she could before finally backing away with a satisfied nod.
“Are you done yet?” Shinobu asked, a faint dusting of blush powdered her cheeks.
“Yeah, you still look tired, but at least you look a little more presentable.” (Y/n) said, opening the lab door and ushering Shinobu through it.
“Presentable.” Shinobu scoffed. “Come with me to the garden?”
“I don’t know if that would be appropriate. I’m not sure who is visiting.”
“Just make yourself busy in the blooms. You live here, you can go where you please.”
“Okay, I’ll come.”
The young girls made their way outside, it was warm and sunny, a bit humid as well after all the rain the week before. The sweet smell of the flowers invited deeper breaths to swallow up the scent into every bronchiole of their lungs.
(Y/n) broke off from Shinobu with a little wave, giving a respectful acknowledgment to the people waiting with their tea before busying herself with the flora. Checking on the quality of the plants as Kanae had taught her. The memories spent with the older girl who had taught her so much made (Y/n) shiver despite the warmth of the sun beating down.
(Y/n) would on occasion, discreetly observe the progression of the meeting. The smile Shinobu wore as she spoke to the visitors unnerved her. Even just the way Shinobu was holding herself now, prim and proper, (Y/n) wondered what they could possibly be talking about.
Then the familiar cawing of a crow circling over her head broke (Y/n) from her thoughts. She released her gentle grip over the flower she had stopped to smell and craned her neck to see her crow calling out to her. A mission, her heartbeat picked up in pace. She hadn’t been on one since a few days before Kanae’s death. How out of practice could she be?
“Pardon the noise,” (Y/n) bowed. The meeting had paused in their hushed conversation to observe the bird as well. (Y/n) hardly gave Shinobu a glance as she past. Her fingers trembling slightly as she made her way back inside to retrieve her nichirin blade from her room. (Y/n)’s mind buzzed and her crow’s caws sounded muted and muffled, far away. She kept walking, willing her breaths to remain controlled. Her concentration broke as a hand reached out from behind her and tugged her back.
(Y/n) turned to meet Shinobu’s eyes. Though more subdued, the concern she saw there was genuine.
“(Y/n), I kept telling you to stop. Are you listening to me?”
“I’m sorry, I guess I was just focusing on the mission ahead.”
Shinobu breathed deeply releasing the air in a shaky exhale before gripping (Y/n)’s face in one hand, surprising her.
“No you weren’t.” Shinobu’s grip was firm, “You need to concentrate on your surroundings. I was almost yelling at you just now. I need to know you are going to be able to keep your head about you out there.”
(Y/n) tried to nod her head but Shinobu’s hand kept her head in place.
“I need to hear you say it.” Shinobu said.
“I can keep my head. I will.” (Y/n) swallowed uncomfortably.
Shinobu searched (Y/n)’s face, slowly releasing her grip from (Y/n)‘s jaw and instead grabbed at the neck of (Y/n)’s uniform pulling her so close their noses bumped.
“You better,” She spoke softly.
“I will,” (Y/n) repeated.
Shinobu untensed, her fingers released (Y/n)’s uniform and she wrapped her arms around her in a tight hug that (Y/n) quickly reciprocated.
“Your meeting,” (Y/n) recalled after a moment.
“I asked to be excused. I’m the master of the estate, I can get away with escaping for for a few minutes.”
“I wouldn’t make a habit out of it if I were you.” (Y/n) attempted to joke.
“Only when it matters.” Shinobu nodded seriously, causing (Y/n)’s heart to leap.
(Y/n)’s crow cawed impatiently and the girls parted. (Y/n) left to retrieve her blade and Shinobu watched her back as she left, her hands clenched into tight fists beneath the sleeves of her sister’s haori.
***
Night after night, the missions kept coming. (Y/n) had begun to wonder if she’d ever get to go home again as days became weeks. Scattered letters between waves of demon slaying were the best she could manage to make sure everyone back home knew she was alright.
Another night, a new moon. A few more nights and it would be a full month since she’d last seen everyone. She was glad she took the time to say goodbye before she left. She never imagined she’d be asked to work for so long without reprieve.
Another well timed flower breathing technique beheads another demon and (Y/n) falls against the trunk of a tree breathing hard. She is uninjured but greatly fatigued. The thought to sit and rest hardly enters her mind before her crow commands her eastward to eliminate another threat before dawn.
Breath after breath, technique after technique, night after night (Y/n) fought until everything ached and beyond. When she saw the the sun peak out over the horizon it was almost enough to bring (Y/n) to tears, but she never faltered. She had to stay strong. This was the life she chose to pursue. To save people from the same fate that befallen so many people she had cared about.
It was during an exceptionally hot day when the sun was at its highest point that (Y/n) flinched awake at the shrill squawks she had grown to loathe.
“What?” She hissed between her teeth, her fingers knotting in the grass that had served as her bed for the day.
“Return home to the Butterfly Estate! Return home to recover and rest! Await further instruction!”
(Y/n) lifted herself to rest on her elbows to stare wide-eyed at the bird sitting in the tree branch overhead. For the first time in that very long month, she allowed the tears to finally fall.
***
(Y/n) felt nervous coming back after so long. She opted to return from the rear entrance in an attempt to not garner too much attention. She allowed herself a tentative smile as the gardens came into view. Her fingers skimmed across the colorful blooms as she walked, freezing up only when she saw Shinobu collecting herbs in the distance. Her foot snapped a twig, alerting Shinobu to glance behind her.
“Hi, stranger.” Shinobu simpered, getting to her feet. “Oh!”
(Y/n) forgot all her previous worries and jogged up to Shinobu, picking her up with the added strength that she had built up in her month long absence and twirled her around with abandon.
“(Y/n)?” Shinobu chuckled with surprise, bracing her arms around (Y/n)‘s shoulders as she was flung around.
“I missed you!” (Y/n) sniffled, finally putting the girl down but still holding her tightly.
“I missed you too.” Shinobu said, rubbing (Y/n)’s back. “What took so long getting back, hm?”
“Mission after mission after mission.” came (Y/n)’s bitter reply. “I actually cried when my crow told me I could come home... I don’t know why I told you that. That’s embarrassing.”
Shinobu laughed, pulling back from (Y/n) to get a good look at her. “My, (Y/n), I can tell your time away had made you stronger. Even if you are still a bit of a crybaby.”
“Hey!” (Y/n) pouted.
“(Y/n) is back!”
“Woah!”
(Y/n) was sent stumbling backward a few steps by three blurs of white. Naho, Sumi and Kiyo spoke a mile a minute filling in (Y/n) on all the goings on of the estate. Aoi and Kanao came by soon after and gave (Y/n) their own greetings, expressing their happiness over the slayer’s return in their own ways.
It was good to be home, it was. But after a few days, (Y/n) really got a chance to see how different Shinobu had become.
The tone of her voice carried like a soft breeze and a polite smile could always be seen on her lips. Aoi reminded (Y/n) more of the Shinobu she remembered than the current Shinobu before her. It unnerved her. The way Shinobu would tilt her head just so and giggle daintily into her hand... it was like staring at a ghost.
(Y/n) thought she could get over the change, but she simply couldn’t. Not when staring into those dark, purple eyes. Oh, how they swirled with anger and despair. If Shinobu couldn’t fully believe in the persona she had crafted for herself, then (Y/n) wouldn’t either. Late one night while helping Shinobu in the lab, (Y/n) finally decided to confront her.
“Why do you keep smiling like that?” (Y/n) frowned, worrying the page of the textbook before her between her fingers.
“Hm? I’m afraid I don’t quite know what you mean.” Shinobu replied casually, smile still firmly in place as she crushed some herbs under her pestle.
“You do too know what I mean,” (Y/n) eyebrows furrowed slightly in aggravation, “why do you keep smiling like you’re okay when you’re clearly not?”
“What have I said or done that makes you think I’m not okay? I’m perfectly fine, (Y/n),” she chuckled, “you worry for nothing.”
“That mask might have everyone else fooled... or maybe they’re just complacent, but I’m tired of pretending nothing is wrong. Talk to me, Shinobu.”
“Don’t be ridiculous,” Shinobu shook her head, “there is nothing to discuss. Perhaps I’ve kept you up too late.”
“You shouldn’t have to hide what you’re truly feeling,” (Y/n) persisted, “not from me at least. I thought we were friends.”
“We are.” Shinobu’s tone was nearly clipped as she crushed the herbs a bit more vigorously.
“Then stop acting so, so fake!” (Y/n) spat, wincing almost immediately as fast has the words came out. There was probably a better way she could have said that. Before she could apologize and try again, Shinobu put the pestle on the table with a harsh clink and stalked over to where (Y/n) was sitting. Fighting to keep her tone in check, she stared (Y/n) down with that plastic smile and spoke in a low, hushed tone that filled (Y/n)’s veins with ice.
“So I’m fake, is that right? People change, (Y/n). You were gone for a month, you can’t expect everyone to wait for you, to not change or grow in your absence.”
“People change, yes,” (Y/n) swallowed tightly at the proximity, “but whatever this is Shinobu, I really don’t think it’s healthy. I can tell you’re bottling something up. Kanae—”
“Leave.”
“...what?”
“Leave,” Shinobu closes the textbook in front of (Y/n) and although she does so with care, the sound is deafening in (Y/n)’s ears, “I don’t care where you go, just get out of my lab. I’ve had my fill of this mindless chatter.”
“Are you being serious right now?” (Y/n) clenched her fists and stood from her chair, the legs slid roughly against the wood below.
“Yes, I don’t have time for immature children right now I’m afraid.” Came Shinobu’s airy reply.
“Immature— stop acting like you know better than me, we’re both kids, we’re fourteen!“ (Y/n) seethes, “I’m worried about you! I care about you! Don’t you get it?”
“Your worry is unfounded. It’s late and you are being of no help to me like this so I’ll ask you once more, leave.”
(Y/n) felt heat pricking the corners of her eyes. “I feel like I don’t know who you are anymore.” She breathed. “But fine, I’ll leave if that’s what you want.”
“At this moment in time, I couldn’t ask for anything better.” Shinobu replied, turning her back to (Y/n) to continue what she had previously been working on.
Once (Y/n) shut the door with finality and her quick footsteps became softer as she ran down the hall, Shinobu exhaled harshly, gripping the pestle tightly in her hand as she mercilessly pounded the dried herbs into dust.
“Only immature people don’t control their emotions... only immature people...”
As Shinobu repeated her mantra, (Y/n) burst into her room and looked around her. With trembling hands she changed into a fresh uniform and packed a small bag of belongings and slinging it over her shoulder. She grabbed her haori and attached her nichirin blade to her hip.
She looked around the room once more and caught her reflection in the little hand mirror on her desk, catching the bright colors of a wing that secured her hair in place. She reached back, freeing her hair from the clip and stared at it. She ran her thumb over the decorative clip before setting it on the desk. She reached for a plain hair band and tied her hair back with that instead.
(Y/n) left her room, sparing one last hurt glance at the butterfly clip before exiting the estate grounds. Before long, her crow circled overhead and (Y/n) held her arm out for the bird to take perch. The crow cawed at her expectantly, questioning her.
“If she wants me to leave, then what else is there to do?” (Y/n) shuddered in the wind. She turned away from the estate, willing herself not to turn back.
“Where will you go?” The crow asked.
“...I don’t know.”
With every step leaving the warmth of the estate farther behind, (Y/n)’s heart grew heavier in her chest.
***
“Have any of you seen (Y/n) today?” Shinobu asked the girls once they had come back in after hanging the laundry out to dry.
A chorus of negatives and head shakes met her and she sighed inwardly. “Very well then. Thank you.”
Shinobu traveled through the maze of hallways that made up her home, easily finding herself in front of (Y/n)’s door, knocking politely. With no reply, Shinobu forced herself not to roll her eyes and opened the door.
“(Y/n), if this is about last night...” Shinobu blinked at the empty room. Futon made, clean floors, not a thing out of place, but no (Y/n).
“Perhaps she’s out training.” Shinobu said to herself. She was about to close the door and head off into the gardens when a glint from the desk caught her eye and she approached. A soft gasp left her lips as she picked up the hairpin. Cradling it in her hands, Shinobu forced her breaths to remain controlled. (Y/n) had never gone a day without wearing the pin since the Kochou sisters gifted it to her.
In the safety of the empty room, Shinobu allowed herself to slump over the desk. She held the discarded hairpin close to her chest, immediately understanding what this small symbol meant. Yes, she knew what it meant, she just wished to know why. She fought against the waves, against the feeling that she was drowning again.
***
Four years was a long time, and if you asked (Y/n), the demon slayer would say that was especially true with her line of work. The demons were never the same, but the routine in between was lonely and dull. Kill a demon, settle down at an inn or in the trees for the day, move to the next village and repeat. Sometimes the stays were longer, but that was the gist of it.
(Y/n) kept to herself most of the time. There wasn’t really a point in making anything more than loose acquaintances with the constant traveling and dangers her work presented. Even on the few missions she had been paired up with other slayers in the area, she focused on the job at hand before quickly making her way to her next assignment. That started to change after she met Kamado Tanjirou and his demon sister Nezuko.
They did not get off on the right foot to say the least.
(Y/n) had been sent to the same location as the young slayer for a mission and knew something was off about him right away. Something off with that box he carried around anyway. (Y/n) opted to let him be for the time being, focusing on the mission ahead. Skip forward to the heat of battle, and (Y/n) could hardly believe her eyes when a demon burst from the boy’s box to attack another demon that had snuck around Tanjirou’s back.
(Y/n) had no time to watch and focus on this new development at the moment, she had her own demons to take care of. Her flower breathing techniques weaved through her enemies and heads went flying. Before long, the mission was completed and (Y/n) turned to the boy breathing heavily in the dirt with the demon from the box hovering over him looking at (Y/n) with curious eyes.
“You’re really skilled, (Y/n)-san!” Tanjirou praised, somehow unaware of the danger his sister was in, “You don’t even look like you’re out of breath.”
“I’ve been doing this for years. I know a lot. For instance,” (Y/n) spoke, her face stern as stone as she readied her blade, startling Tanjirou, “every demon must be destroyed.” She went in with a quick slash aimed at the demon’s neck  only to pause at the last second when the foolish younger boy leapt to his feet to shield the demon from the blow.
“What are you doing?” (Y/n) asked sternly.
“Wait, she’s my sister! She’s a good demon!”
“I shouldn’t have to tell you that what you are doing is against corps rules. I can sympathize with wanting to hold onto your loved ones, but there is no such thing as a good demon. Step aside.”
“No, Nezuko has never eaten a human and she never will!” Tanjirou held his ground while his sister growled at (Y/n) from behind him.
(Y/n) rolled her eyes. “Alright then,” she said with a sarcastic sweetness, “prove it.”
“What?” Tanjirou blinked.
“Prove it, take off the muzzle. Let’s see if she has as much control as you claim she does.”
“But—“
“It shouldn’t be a problem, right? If she’s as docile as you claim what’s the issue?”
Tanjirou grit his teeth and gently pulled the muzzle to rest around his sister’s neck. (Y/n) stepped forward, her face inches away from the demon. She wasn’t worried, if the demon lunged for her she was confident she could slice its head the moment the air changed.
“Well demon?” (Y/n) sighed, surprising Tanjirou by slicing the pad of her thumb on her sharp blade, “hungry?”
To Nezuko’s credit, she hardly flinched. However, her eyes followed the path of the blood and a small trickle of drool slid past her lips. (Y/n) taunted her a bit further, waving the bloodied hand in front of her nose, still Nezuko held strong and even went as far as turning away.
“...I must say, I’m rather impressed,” (Y/n) finally spoke, stepping back from the demon and licking at her own wound, “marechi blood such as my own usually makes the demons go crazy,” she turns back to Tanjirou, “still, you must know that keeping a demon alive like this, especially as a slayer, is dangerous for both of you.”
“I know,” Tanjirou bowed his head.
“Well,” (Y/n) stretched and sighed, “as long as you know I guess it’s your own problem.”
“Huh?”
“Yeah, just don’t call me out if a Hashira finds you out. I don’t feel like dying a disgrace.” (Y/n) waved him off. “You’re going to have to work even harder and be more discreet. That’s my advice to you.” And (Y/n) was going to leave it at that and walk away, but then her crow chanted in tandem with Tanjirou’s, calling them to continue forward together. (Y/n)′s eye twiched at the grating sounds.
“It looks like we’ll still be working together for some time, (Y/n)-san!” Tanjirou smiled, catching the older girl off guard by the sincerity behind it. You’d think he’d be more put off considering (Y/n) was planning to kill his sister not five minutes ago.
“I suppose we are.”
“Say, (Y/n)-san, you’re strong. You can help me get stronger too, right?”
“Mm!”
“Hey, get her off of me!” (Y/n) momentarily panicked as the demon wrapped her arms around her waist.
“Nezuko, manners!”
(Y/n) wasn’t sure what she had done to get saddled with the strange siblings, but she could tell her job just went above her pay grade.
***
As it turns out, the Kamado siblings weren’t so bad. In fact, (Y/n) was starting to get really attached to the two. It was when Inosuke and Zenitsu were pulled into their little group, that was when (Y/n) realized she didn’t know what true pain was.
“(Y/n)-san, marry me!”
“Flower Girl, fight me!”
All damn day and night.
(Y/n) thought she’d finally have reprieve once Tanjirou had healed up at the Wisteria House, but of course the two boisterous boys were being sent with them to their next mission, Natagumo Mountain.
Zenitsu cowered at the forest edge and (Y/n) felt no remorse in leaving him behind as she sprinted ahead of Inosuke and Tanjirou, freeing the puppeted Mizunoto slayers.
Eventually they had been split off from each other to fight their own battles. (Y/n) was tired but otherwise unharmed, surprised when a small Nezuko came barreling into her.
“Nezu—?” (Y/n) gasped as the air shifted above her and she dodged the quick swipe aimed at the tiny body that clung to her. She quickly pivoted, blade in hand, and crossed swords with the assailant her eyes blowing wide at the placid face in front of her.
“Kanao?!” (Y/n) yelled out, the nostalgia and adrenaline coursing through her body was an odd, slightly terrifying combination.
Kanao tilted her head, her lips parted ever so slightly as recognition gleamed in her eyes. Despite this, Kanao did have a mission to complete and (Y/n) was keeping her from completing her orders. She continued swiping at the older girl she used to know, trying to behead the demon she could not fathom why she was protecting.
(Y/n) parried and blocked best she could, taking a defensive approach while she tried to talk Kanao down. She didn’t want to hurt Kanao, but she didn’t want Nezuko to be killed either.
Finally a saving grace, a crow swooping by with a message that saved Nezuko’s neck. (Y/n) sighed in relief as Kanao pulled back. Still looking at (Y/n) she pointed to the small demon that had wrapped herself tightly over (Y/n)’s back.
“Is this Nezuko?” She asked looking for a positive ID on the demon in question.
“Yes.” (Y/n) easily replied.
“Come with me then.” Kanao said, already corralling (Y/n) and her demon backpack in the direction of the forest edge.
(Y/n) walked alongside her a bit begrudgingly. If she made a break for it, she could have probably gotten away, but it was very likely Tanjirou and the others were already in custody. The best chance they had now was to do as they were told and hope Nezuko’s resolve would stand firm.
So (Y/n) hid Nezuko in her haori as the sun began to peak over the hills and followed Kanao to the clearing of bustling Kakushi. On the way, she began preparing her story for the trial she was sure her little team was bound to endure.
She was immediately broken from her thoughts at the ethereal sight of the Insect Pillar emerging from another point of the woods with the Water Pillar and a badly beaten Tanjirou on his back.
(Y/n)’s breath caught in her throat as those deep, dark eyes found hers at it was like time was at a stand still. At least it would have been if not for Shinobu steadily making her way towards her, her expression painfully impassive beyond the small upturn of her lips. Shinobu kept coming until she was directly in front of (Y/n).
Nezuko stirred in her sleep, clutching at (Y/n)’s back as if she could sense anxiety in the slayer’s heart. The demon was the only thing grounding her at this point as Shinobu tilted her head, an almost sinister look in her eye as she observed the small demon bundle protected by (Y/n)’s haori. All too soon, her cold eyes found their way back to (Y/n)’s and she spoke.
“I’m not going to have to tie you up, am I?”
(Y/n) closed her eyes briefly and tried to take a calming breath. With a short, almost imperceivable shake of her head, she hoarsely replied.
“No.”
“Let’s try to keep it that way then.”
Shinobu and Kanao had let (Y/n) help Nezuko into her box, but then they immediately separated the two, having a Kakushi carry the box with a wary look in her eyes. (Y/n) did her best not to look behind her where Kanao and Shinobu walked, no doubt watching her for any sign of flight.
She gulped, eyes nervously shifting to the Water Pillar walking beside her, and the Kakushi who was now carrying Tanjirou in his stead. The Water Pillar spared her an emotionless glance as he forged ahead.
“Is he going to be alright?” She asked in a hushed tone.
Enough time had passed after her question that (Y/n) had figured the man wasn’t in the mood to talk, understandably so, but (Y/n) was worried about the state Tanjirou was in. She nearly jumped out of her skin when he actually answered her minutes later.
“That will all depend on how the trial goes.”
(Y/n) felt dread pool in her stomach as they continued to march down the mountain.
***
The garden of the Master’s estate would have been lovely on any other occasion, but (Y/n) could only bring herself to stare at the pebbles below her knees and Tanjirou passed out at her side. They had taken Nezuko somewhere else in the meantime, she could only hope they would let the demon be, let her prove herself in front of them instead of killing her on principle.
(Y/n) could feel that Shinobu was standing just behind her but she dared not engage. Four years of silence between the two and a trial for treason in the highest regard had brought them together again. (Y/n) wanted to scream.
Finally Tanjirou began to stir and (Y/n) allowed herself to push away her turmoil to rouse the younger boy gently. The last thing they needed was for him to be all up in arms before the trial even officially began.
“(Y/n)-san,” Tanjirou winced, “where are we? Where is Nezuko?”
“We’re at the Demon Slayer Headquarters,” (Y/n) replied, her voice was hardly above a whisper as she felt the pressure of all the Hashira’s eyes boring into them, “I don’t know where they’re keeping Nezuko, but right now you need to focus on the trial ahead.”
“The trial?”
“For harboring a demon, Tanjirou.”
“I wouldn’t bother trying to justify it! A crime as heinous as yours only ends one way!” Rengoku Kyojirou loudly proclaimed, rallying a range of replies from his fellow pillars.
“Now that he’s finally awake to witness his punishment, let’s behead these traitors and the demon and get on with our lives.” Uzui Tengen added.
“Please,” (Y/n) forced her voice not to waiver, “allow him to explain the situation at least—“
“You’re in no position to be asking for favors, girl.” Obanai Iguro cut her off, glaring down at her from where he lounged on a tree branch. “You had best hold your tongue. A slayer at your rank should be ashamed. I’m surprised you haven’t already sliced yourself open for the embarrassment you’ve brought to the corps.”
“Iguro-san!” Kanroji gasped at the harsh words.
“Who are these people, (Y/n)-san?” Tanjirou groaned, noticing for the first time that his hands were tied tightly behind his back.
“Tanjirou, are you serious?” (Y/n)’s tone was hushed and urgent, “they’re the Hashira! You know, best of the demon slayers?”
“I don’t know, umph!” (Y/n) hastily covered his mouth, a nervous sweat gathered at her brow.
“Just try to be respectful, will you? You already broke the thin ice you’ve been traveling on, let’s try not to drown as well!”
“This isn’t right, (Y/n)-san! Where is Nezuko? Zenitsu? Inosuke? Murata?” Tanjirou spoke out, his voice heavy with emotion as he fought his way up to his knees.
“What I want to know is why we haven’t tied Tomioka or the Kinoe ranked slayer.” Obanai sneered from his tree, ignoring Tanjirou’s desperate tone. “They are both part of the boy’s schemes and should be punished as such. How are we going to teach them a lesson?”
“Oh they’ll be fine,” (Y/n) shivered hearing Shinobu speak above her from where she knelt in the pebbles, “we’ll come up with a penalty later.”
(Y/n) froze, her eyes refused to look up beyond the feet that stood before Tanjirou and herself.
“What I’m interested right now, is hearing this boy’s story.” Shinobu said. “He’s been traveling with a demon all this time, and I wish to hear why. It must be quite the tale to have Tomioka-san break ranks,” the feet take a step closer and Shinobu’s voice dropped in volume, “and you as well, (Y/n).”
(Y/n) tightened her grip over her pant leg, still refusing to look up. She could imagine an array of expressions her old friend could be wearing right now that could cut her deeper than any blade. Pity, anger, disgust, smugness, apathy, that blank smile... no, (Y/n) couldn’t bear to look up.
“So why, Kamado Tanjirou?” Shinobu asked.
“Who cares?” Uzui scoffed from a few yards away, yet he waited for the boy to explain himself.
“She’s my—“ he broke into a fit of coughs and (Y/n) tried to soothe his back, telling him to breathe.
Shinobu stooped down, a gourd of water in hand, offering the water to Tanjirou and finally catching (Y/n)’s eyes as the boy drank the medicated water. When Shinobu’s eyes returned to Tanjirou, (Y/n) remembered how to breathe.
“She’s my little sister!” Tanjirou proclaimed. “She’s never hurt anyone and she never will!”
A few of the Hashira began casting their doubt, but Tanjirou powered through.
“I became a slayer to find a cure for her! In two whole years since she became a demon, she’s never eaten a single person! Let her continue to fight by my side!”
“Well, well, looks like the fun’s already starting.”
(Y/n) turned her head and her breathing hitched. Of course the Wind Pillar of all people would get his hands on Nezuko’s box.
“Is this the boy who has been traveling with a demon? Just what the hell do you think you’re doing?” Shinazugawa asked with a sinister grin.
“Please put down the box Shinazugawa-sama!” The Kakushi (Y/n) recalled to have prior possession of the box pleaded.
“Shinazugawa, please do not act out of line.” Shinobu warned.
“Nah, run that by me again, kid?” Sanemi jeered, holding the box precariously in one hand, “fighting alongside a demon? Impossible, you idiot!”
Tanjirou and (Y/n) called out in horror as the Hashira rammed his blade clean through the box, skewering Nezuko.
Tanjirou scrambled to his feet and lunged at Sanemi, (Y/n) was about to get to her feet as well, but Shinobu held her firmly in place, clutching (Y/n)’s arm tightly while shooting her a warning glance.
(Y/n) could only watch, mouth agape, as Tanjirou head butted Shinazugawa to the ground.
Mitsuri attempted to stifle a snort, covering her face in her hands.
“If you can’t tell the difference between good demons and bad ones, then you don’t deserve to be a Hashira!” Tanjirou yelled.
“We’re doomed.” (Y/n) whispered weakly. She felt as if all her blood was sinking to her knees, sinking as fast as their chance of forgiveness down the drain.
Before Sanemi could retaliate, a couple of Oyakata-sama’s children announced the Master’s arrival. (Y/n) was quick to follow Shinobu in a bow, wincing when she heard what could only be Sanemi pounding Tanjirou into the rocks, forcing him to bow.
“Hello everyone,” Oyakata-sama addressed the garden, his voice carried in the warm breeze, “how good it feels to have you all here.”
Sanemi greeted the Master, formally asking for an explanation. If not for the seriousness of the moment, (Y/n) would have rolled her eyes.
“The Kamado siblings have been sanctioned, you see. I request you all respect that.” Oyakata stated simply.
An array of mostly negative objections arose at this ending with Sanemi calling for punishments for Tanjirou, (Y/n), and Giyuu.
The Master stood silently for a moment before asking one of his children to read a letter aloud. A letter from a previous Hashira, detailing Nezuko’s history. The letter also revealing that should Nezuko fail; Urokodaki, Tanjirou, and Giyuu would atone through seppuku.
A few of the Hashira were still willing to speak against such a plan, swearing that it was not a risk worth taking. Once there was a lull in their heated remarks,  Ubuyashiki saw fit to address (Y/n).
“(Y/n), my child.”
(Y/n)’s head jutted up at the sudden call of attention to her presence. “Ye— yes, Master?”
“Why do you think that of the squad that has been built around you, only you are here?” Oyakata-sama asked with an warm smile.
“I would suppose it would be because I should know better than a ragtag group of Mizunoto, Master.” came (Y/n)’s subdued reply.
“I would hope so.” The Master chuckled, causing heat to bloom across (Y/n)’s cheeks. “Why didn’t you kill the demon?”
“I was going to, but she proved herself to me,” (Y/n) began speaking more evenly as she recalled the moment, “I presented her with my blood, my rare blood, and she turned away. I have traveled with the Kamado siblings for weeks and not once had Nezuko hurt anyone. She protects people, she sleeps to replenish energy. Based on everything I have observed, I believe in Nezuko. I believe in Tanjirou.”
“Would you stake your life on this along with the others listed here today?” Oyakata-sama asked.
(Y/n) breathed in, firmly nodding her head. Her eyes meeting Ubuyashiki’s milky blank one’s despite his lack of vision.
“Yes, I would.”
Shinobu’s hold on (Y/n)’s bicep curled. (Y/n) hadn’t realized she had still been holding her down.
“And here we have three, now four, people willing to take responsibility for this demon. What say you, my children?” The Master asked the Hashira warmly.
“Forgive me Master, but this is not a matter of numbers!” Sanemi yelled, “Demons are sick creatures that need to be put down and I’ll prove it to you now!”
Sanemi sliced his arm, much more blood than (Y/n) had conjured with the small cut to her thumb that she had presented to Nezuko. She and Tanjirou watched as the blood dripped to the box, staining the lacquered wood.
“No good doing this in the light.” Obanai said, “it won’t come out unless it’s dark.”
Sanemi dashed to the shaded engawa, enticing Nezuko to come out with another stab at the box.
“No!” Tanjirou yelled, he made to scramble to the engawa, but was quickly subdued by Obanai.
“Stop!” (Y/n) echoed Tanjirou’s sentiments, pulling against Shinobu’s hold. “Why are you being so needlessly cruel?”
Sanemi ignored them, a wicked grin on his face as he watched Nezuko emerge from the box, growling lowly.
“Well then, demon?” He sneered, holding out his arm.
(Y/n) could tell Nezuko was straining against the pull of the marechi blood. With all of the injuries she had sustained working against her as well, it couldn’t be easy for the demon to hold back.
“Nezuko!” Tanjirou wheezed as Obanai was pincering his lung painfully with his elbow.
“Kamado-kun,” Shinobu addressed, “don’t struggle too much while in that hold, your lung might burst.”
Tanjirou only struggled harder, surprising everyone when he broke through his rope restraints and stumbled towards the engawa. Tomioka stopped Obanai from pinning him again.
“Nezuko!” Tanjirou called again.
His voice seemed to finally break through to Nezuko and after a few tense moments, she turned away from Sanemi in disgust.
(Y/n) couldn’t help the relieved smile that overtook her lips.
Once the scene was relayed to the Master, he seemed pleased with the report. He told Tanjirou that although Nezuko had done well to prove herself, they would need to grow even stronger before they could be fully accepted by the others. With that wisdom, he said they were free to go.
(Y/n) startled as Shinobu finally let her go, raising her arm to speak. “If all is well then Oyakata-sama, allow me to provide lodging for them.”
Both (Y/n) and Tanjirou seemed a bit wary of this sudden hospitality, (Y/n) even more so, but if Shinobu noticed or cared she didn’t show it, signaling the Kakushi who had been standing by to gather the injured boy and the demon.
The Kakushi tasked with carrying Nezuko seemed a bit frightened of the little demon kneeling in her box, so naturally (Y/n) rose to carry her instead.
“I’ve got her.” She smiled kindly and reached for the box and secured it shut, but not before giving the demon girl a few well earned head pats that rose Nezuko’s mood greatly.
Another Kakushi picked up Tanjirou then (Y/n) and the two Kakushi quickly made their retreat. That is, until Tanjirou bursted back into the garden asking to headbutt Sanemi.
“Please excuse us!” (Y/n) and the two Kakushi bowed deeply once they got him back under control and sped off twice as fast. (Y/n) and the Kakushi running beside her berated Tanjirou from where he sat on the other Kakushi’s back for such a disrespectful display after being allowed the impossible. 
When they reached the Butterfly Estate, (Y/n)’s heart squeezed in her chest. The grounds looked to be near the same as the night she had left. No one was there to greet them at the door, so they went around the gardens and found Kanao standing amongst the butterflies.
“Hi, Kanao.” (Y/n) greeted the younger girl bashfully. Now that they weren’t battling over keeping Nezuko’s head, (Y/n) finally took in how much she had grown in four years.
Kanao stayed silent, a serene smile on her lips as she merely observed the group that had approached her.
“What are you all here for?” A sharp voice called from behind them, causing the Kakushi to jump and spin to quickly explain they were here to put Tanjirou in the infirmary.
“Well then come with me...” Aoi’s words trailed off a bit once her eyes found (Y/n)’s face.
“Hi Aoi,” (Y/n) gave a nervous half wave, “you’ve gotten a bit taller.”
Aoi marched straight up to (Y/n) and berated her with a barrage of small fists pounding painlessly against her chest. “What would you expect after being gone so long!” She sniffed, “Four years without a single letter or visit? We thought you were dead, idiot!”
“(Y/n)-san? Do you know these people?” Tanjirou asked from Gotou’s back.
“Yeah, I uh, sorta used to live here.” (Y/n) replied, allowing Aoi to continue hitting her to her heart’s content.
“‘Sorta used to live here’, you’re family! You have always had a place here! Now come on, I’m sure Kiyo, Sumi, and Naho will have a bone to pick with you as well. And Shinobu-sama!” Aoi’s fist struck especially hard at the thought, “Shinobu-sama is going to have some choice words for you when she gets back I just know it!”
Aoi led them all inside, occasionally throwing a few more jabs into (Y/n)’s side to make sure she was really there. She didn’t admit that was what they were for of course, she played it off more as a punishment for disappearing for so long.
There was screaming coming from the infirmary and (Y/n) would have been worried if she hadn’t recognized the sound almost immediately.
“Zenitsu!” Tanjirou called excitedly.
While Tanjirou and poor Gotou were dealing with the sobbing, snotty boy, Aoi had dragged (Y/n) over to Kiyo who had been tending to Zenitsu only moments before.
“Look who finally decided to come home.” Aoi told the younger girl who looked up, tilting her head. (Y/n) almost thought Kiyo hadn’t recognized her. Being as young as she was, she wouldn’t have blamed her, but then she burst forward and hugged (Y/n) tightly around her waist.
“What’s going on in here? Hm, Aoi-san, Kiyo?”
Naho and Sumi had made their way into the infirmary with a basket of fresh linens and paused at the entryway for a moment before they realized who their friend was hugging and ran over to join her with tears in their eyes.
“(Y/n)-san, where have you been all this time?” Naho whimpered.
“Why didn’t you say anything before you left?” Sumi cried.
“I’m sorry,” (Y/n) knelt down to better hug them all, “I know it’s not enough to make up for anything, but I’m sorry for leaving like that. It wasn’t fair,” she looked up to meet Aoi’s stern blue eyes, “to any of you.”
“Well, make it up to us by sticking around from now on.” Aoi said, crossing her arms. “No more running away.”
“But...” (Y/n) was conflicted. Had Shinobu not told the girls why she had left? (Y/n) mustered up the best smile she could and nodded feebly. “All right.”
“(Y/n)-san, your box is... humming?” Sumi pointed at the wooden box.
“Oh, um, you see... in this box is my friend, Nezuko,” (Y/n) treaded carefully, not wishing to startle the girls too badly if she could help it.
“You have someone in a box?” Aoi barked, “well let them out for goodness sake!”
“It’s a little bright in here...” (Y/n) shifted her vision to where Tanjirou and Zenitsu were talking, catching sight of Inosuke as well. Poor boar boy looked like he’d seen better days. “And I’m not sure that Shinobu-” should she still speak of her so informally? “-would be pleased if I let her out without her blessing.”
“Why wouldn’t Shinobu-sama allow you to let someone out of a box?” Aoi rolled her eyes.
“It’s complicated. I’m sure she’ll want to talk to you all about it once she comes back. Until then, Nezuko will be fine in here.”
The girls, though incredulous, let the subject drop for now. Although, they couldn’t help but eye the box with suspicion. Once Tanjirou was settled in the infirmary, the butterfly girls dragged (Y/n) away to talk about the goings on of the last four years which soon devolved into hounding (Y/n) for her own stories to share, even Kanao had come by to sit and listen.
“...And that’s how I helped the fishing village take care of the demon that was lurking in the sea.”
“Tell us another one, (Y/n)-san!” The youngest girls pleaded, kicking their feet in the air behind them. They had migrated to lay flat on their stomachs as the stories progressed and watched (Y/n) recount her adventures with their heads propped up on their arms with rapt attention.
“I’m afraid that will have to wait for another time, it’s quite late you know.”
Everyone turned to the door to find Shinobu staring down at them. The youngest girls pouted a bit, trying to get a bit more time to stick around, but Shinobu held firm and directed them to their rooms.
“You’ll still be here tomorrow, right? (Y/n)-san?” Sumi asked from the doorway.
“I...” (Y/n) pulled at the sleeve of her uniform and subtly pursed her lips while trying to figure out how to proceed, to her surprise, Shinobu spoke up on her behalf.
“I promise you’ll see her in the morning. Now of to bed. (Y/n) and I have much to discuss.”
The thought of having a prolonged conversation with Shinobu sent shivers through (Y/n)’s spine. Once all the girls were well out of sight, Shinobu redirected her attention to (Y/n).
“Let’s drop off your cargo first,” Shinobu said, motioning to the box sitting beside (Y/n), “I’ve arranged a room and Kamado-kun has been wondering where his... sister, has been.”
“Of course.” (Y/n) stood, shouldering the box.
Apparently the room was rather far. (Y/n) felt as if the silence between them was slowly eating at her until she finally decided to speak. For better or for worse.
“You’ve taken all of this extraordinarily well,” (Y/n) commented, testing the waters.
“Mm, I’d like to hold off on any conversation until we drop off the demon. Use this time to gather any thoughts, if you have them that is.”
(Y/n)’s brow furrowed slightly, eyes narrowed. She was sure that was some kind of dig at her intelligence, but she held her tongue.
They dropped off Nezuko, (Y/n) and Tanjirou bid each other good night, and then (Y/n) was led to an all too familiar space, the lab.
Shinobu motioned for (Y/n) to sit at one of the less cluttered tables while she closed the door firmly behind them. (Y/n) would have been lying if she said she wasn’t even just a tad bit concerned by the setting of this ‘talk’ that was about to unfold. Finally, Shinobu took the stool across from her on the other side of the table. She laced her fingers together, using them to prop up her chin as her endlessly amethyst eyes bore into (Y/n)’s. That ghostly smile seemingly perfected after four years of separation, had (Y/n)’s hands clench into fists under the table.
“So,” Shinobu began, her voice deceptively sweet, “when exactly do you think it was when you completely lost your mind?”
“Excuse me?” (Y/n)’s eye twitched.
“Defending a demon, offering up your own life for a demon to live... how insanely idiotic. I thought you were smarter than that. I suppose it had been.. four years, was it? Four years since you ran off. And I thought that was the most careless thing you could ever do. You really have outdone yourself!”
“Stop,” (Y/n) had heard enough of these little jabs and she new well enough Shinobu could go all day as long as she hadn’t changed too drastically in their time apart. However, Shinobu powered through.
“Everyone was devastated when you left you know. We were a family and you just up and left in the middle of the night without a word so soon after—“ After Kanae, “Now you’re putting everything on the line for some demon? You’re a coward. A selfish coward.”
(Y/n) was really angry now. She stood up so fast her stool clattered to the ground behind her. She slammed her hands against the table and stared furiously into Shinobu’s placid expression, though she could detect a hint of a heated spark in those deep purple eyes.
“Don’t act like you’re so innocent in all of this! You told me to leave! You want to judge me for trusting Nezuko with my life, fine! But I only did what you commanded of me when I left. You don’t get to say I just fucked off because you think I didn’t care enough!”
Shinobu had the nerve to chuckle, though no trace of humor was there, as she slowly rose to her own feet and assumed a similar stance over the table as (Y/n).
“Did you really think when I said that, when I told you to leave the lab, I meant I wanted you to walk out of my life?” Shinobu asked seriously.
“I didn’t know what you wanted! You weren’t the same person anymore! Don’t try telling me that it wasn’t what you wanted either, you never came looking for me. You never sent your crow. Tell me you weren’t ecstatic when you woke up that morning and didn’t have to deal with me anymore!”
Shinobu slapped her own hand against the table, a vein pulsed painfully under the skin of her forehead. She opened her mouth to retort, poisoned words ready to lash out with a flick of her tongue, but as luck would have it, a Kakushi nervously called from the other side of the door.
“Kochou-sama, the treatments for the, uh, despiderfication of the slayers from Natagumo Mountain are ready to be carried out with your supervision.”
Shinobu closed her eyes, breathing in deeply before opening them again and looking significantly more drained.
“I see. Please inform the others that I’ll be there in a few moments.”
“Right away, Kochou-sama.”
As the footsteps pattered away, (Y/n) fixed her stool upright before heading in the direction of the door, assuming she and Shinobu were done talking, or screaming rather. (Y/n) was surprised to feel Shinobu grasp her hand as she tried to pass by.
“You remember where your room is, right?” Shinobu asked, the undertones of her voice still taut with anger.
(Y/n) too tired to fight on, responded simply with a mute nod.
“I had the Kakushi clean it earlier today. Everything should still be as you left it.”
Shinobu let go of (Y/n)’s hand and it immediately felt cold. The Hashira opened the lab door and stepped out into the hallway, her back to (Y/n) as she made her last parting statement.
“If you know what is good for you, you won’t step a foot outside of estate grounds without speaking to me first.”
“And if I don’t?” (Y/n) asked just to be obstinate.
“Then I guess I’ll have to hunt you down for sport.” Shinobu quickly replied, turning to face (Y/n) just to show her how serious she was.
(Y/n) couldn’t help the weak guffaw that left her lips. To hear such a threat delivered by such a soothing tone was practically oxymoronic.
Shinobu lingered for a moment longer before gliding off to see to her patients while (Y/n) turned down the opposite end of the hallway and traveled down a few more to find herself standing outside of her old room. She opened the door, the space was clean as Shinobu promised. She closed the door softly behind her, blocking off the light from the hall. There would be time to be sentimental in the morning. Right now, between the Mountain, the trial and the emotional battle with the Insect Hashira herself, (Y/n) was exhausted. She scooted her way into the freshly made futon and fell asleep with the nostalgic smell of wisteria petals drifting through her airways.
***
(Y/n) awoke around mid-morning to the sun shining through her window. She stretched and got dressed, her fingers pausing over the last few buttons of her uniform as she glanced over the desk.
The butterfly hair clip she had once worn with pride sat in front of her. It appeared to be left untouched by time. Not even a speck of dust adorned the colorful wings. She reached out to it, but her fingers curled just before she touched it. She pulled her hand back as a knock sounded on the door.
“Yes?”
“It’s Aoi.” A voice called from the other side.
(Y/n) quickly took the last few steps needed to reach the door and slid it open to greet Aoi but before she could, the stern girl stepped inside and pulled the door shut again.
“Were you and Shinobu-sama fighting last night?” She asked hurriedly.
“Where did you hear that?” (Y/n) answered the question with one of her own.
“The Kakushi are partial to gossip. Now what did you do!” Aoi huffed, jabbing (Y/n)’s shoulder.
“Why does it have to be me? Shinobu was the one who started it!” (Y/n) backed up, rubbing her shoulder.
“You two better make up soon. It will hurt Naho, Sumi and Kiyo if they find out you’re still mad at each other,” Aoi crossed her arms over her chest.
“It’s not that easy, Aoi. It’s been four years. It’s not all going to go away overnight.”
“Do I have to do everything around here?” Aoi grumbled to herself, passing a hand over her face. “I’ll help you, but you better try to be civil.”
“Aoi, I don’t need help. I’m sorry that fight got back to you. If Shinobu and I talk again, I promise I’ll try harder to keep my temper in check, okay?”
Aoi sighed and shook her head, “Fine. That wasn’t what I had come to talk to you about anyway.”
“Oh,” (Y/n) tilted her head, “then what is it?”
“Your friends,” Aoi pinched the bridge of her nose, “they’re driving me crazy. I need you to get the blonde and the boar to participate in recovery training.”
“I’ll see what I can do.” (Y/n) answered with slight reluctance. She knew just how difficult those two could be.
Aoi and (Y/n) arrived at the room that was being used for the boys’ recovery training. Tanjirou was already working hard, trying to catch Kanao in a game of tag, while Zenitsu and Inosuke watched from the corner with bitter disinterest.
“Hey,” (Y/n) addressed the younger teens, “what’s the problem? Don’t you guys want to get better? Stronger?”
“It’s pointless.” Inosuke weakly answered.
“(Y/n)-san, this training is too difficult!” Zenitsu cried.
(Y/n) dodged the weepy blonde’s attempts at hugging her and bonked him on the head with the side of her fist.
“I feel no sympathy for you. Aoi and the others are working really hard to get you back in fighting shape, the least you could do is put a little bit of effort in!” (Y/n) crossed her arms, “before you know it, Tanjirou will leave you both in the dust. Do you really want that?”
Zenitsu and Inosuke grunted, still refusing to budge. (Y/n) motioned for Naho to hand her a cup of medicated water and promptly splashed its contents all over the boys.
“What was that for?” Zenitsu screeched.
“Want revenge? Come take me on.” (Y/n) motioned to the table of cups.
Naho, Sumi and Kiyo made small sounds of excitement, trying to encourage the boys, but they just grumbled and walked back to the infirmary.
“You guys are going to regret walking away!” (Y/n) called after them. “Let me know when you are done moping and want to get back to work!”
“Oh my.” Shinobu giggled as she walked in, watching Zenitsu and Inosuke sulk past her.
Shinobu turned to observe the room, pausing at (Y/n). Her eyes flickered down at (Y/n)’s chest and stayed there long enough for the other slayer to notice.
“What?” (Y/n) had grumbled mostly to herself as she followed Shinobu’s gaze downward. Heat shot to her face immediately as she realized she had forgotten to finish buttoning her uniform after Aoi distracted her. It wasn’t showing a lot, just her collar bones and a bit of her chest, but it was still jarring. With a strangled chirp, she quickly buttoned her uniform the rest of the way.
“Oh please, no need to cover up on my account.” Shinobu easily teased, though she felt a bit embarrassed to have been caught staring. She wasn’t entirely sure why her vision gravitated there to begin with.
After a few false starts, (Y/n) finally choked out, “what do you want?”
“I need Kanao and Aoi to help me gather more herbs for spider demon antidotes, not that it’s any of your business.”
“Kochou-sama,” Aoi interjected before (Y/n) could retaliate, “Kanao and I are helping Tanjirou complete his recovery training for the day. I’ve asked (Y/n)-san to fill in for us and she has readily agreed to take our place.”
(Y/n) gave Aoi a look, prompting the younger girl to pinch at (Y/n)’s side discreetly. A message to keep her mouth shut. Kanao simply blinked, twisting on the ball of her foot to dodge another one of Tanjirou’s lunges.
“Very well then, keep up (Y/n). I hope you still remember a thing or two about plants in that thick skull of yours,” Shinobu glided past (Y/n) to step out onto the engawa, “though I wouldn’t be too surprised if all of that knowledge fell out of your head along with your common sense.”
(Y/n) opened her mouth before shutting it firmly closed. Remembering that the younger girls were there and what Aoi had asked of her, she pursed her lips and silently fell into step beside the Hashira, walking with her to the nearby forest where the herbs they needed flourished.
“You recall what Aralia Cordata looks like, correct?” Shinobu asked once they were well within the trees.
“Yeah, kind of hard to miss that shrub if you know what you’re looking for.” (Y/n) groused.
“Fine, fine. Don’t come crying to me if you touch something poisonous.”
“I won’t. Won’t touch anything poisonous I mean. Because I know what I’m doing.”
“Are you telling me that or are you just trying to reassure yourself?”
(Y/n) chose not to reply, instead she split off from Shinobu to one of the shrubs in question and began harvesting a few leafy tendrils from it. Before long, her basket was filled and she turned just in time to see Shinobu turn back to her own bush, pretending to examine one of the tendrils she had cut.
“You know,” (Y/n) sighed as she stood back to her full height, “Aoi only made me come here in her stead because that fight we had last night got back to her. She expects us to make up.”
“Mm, I figured it was something like that,” Shinobu hummed, “I do believe that for once, she is too optimistic in that regard.”
“Well, you never did like admitting when you were wrong,” (Y/n) shrugged, “or saying you’re sorry. It’s comforting to know you haven’t completely destroyed your old personality.”
“And what exactly have I been wrong about, (Y/n)?” Shinobu’s forehead pulsed, “what exactly have I done that requires an apology?”
“You lie to everyone Shinobu. You hide behind plastic smiles pretending to be someone you’re not to fill a void. Saying your fine and shrugging everyone off while holding them at arm's length. When I tried to talk to you, you pushed me away and told me to leave. You were dismissive, cold.”
(Y/n) wrapped her arms around herself as if a chilling wind overcame her. Continuing on, she spoke lowly before Shinobu could speak her denial.
“Not to say that I don’t have my own fault in all of this. Even if I thought you really wanted me gone that night, I should have fought harder for you. I knew you were hurting, but I gave up and left anyway. That is something I’ve thought about a lot in our time apart and I regret it every day because you were worth fighting for.”
(Y/n) blew out a harsh breath of air, running a hand over her scalp she made her closing statement.
“If there was one thing you were right about last night, it’s that I’m a coward and I’m sorry that I didn’t try harder.”
(Y/n) chanced a look at Shinobu’s face. The Hashira’s eyes rounded and her mouth was ever so slightly agape. The silence hung in the air until a sweet wisteria breeze swept through the trees and (Y/n) cleared her throat and looked away.
“So if we could at least pretend to get along for the sake of the girls, I think Aoi would appreciate it.” (Y/n) added before reaching down to collect her basket. A sudden noise, like air being rapidly released through one’s nose, came from behind (Y/n) and she paused in her movements to glance back at Shinobu who was looking down at the leaf she was worrying between her fingers.
“I... apologize, for pushing you away in such a way that made you think you had to exile yourself. It was also cruel of me to say you didn’t care about us when I knew that you thought of this place as your home. I was trying to hurt you back and that was wrong of me. I’m sorry.” Shinobu solemnly said.
Now it was (Y/n)’s turn to stare. Soon, Shinobu leveled a cocky smile and stood with her basket of leaves and a few other miscellaneous plants she gathered.
“Looks like you were wrong about my ability to apologize, hm?” She said.
“Shut up. Don’t ruin the moment.” (Y/n) smiled, reaching for her own basket.
The atmosphere surrounding the girls leaving the forest felt a lot more relaxed than it had upon entering.
***
Days turned into weeks and everything seemed so much better after. It was still awkward at times, but (Y/n) and Shinobu were finding their rhythm again. There was still a little hostility at times, but rather than avoid each other, they talked it out. It was almost frightening how in sync they were when they were working well together.
(Y/n) split her time between helping Shinobu with the slayers turned spiders and helping the younger girls train Tanjirou. She was elated by the boy’s progress as he finally managed to catch Kanao. She had noticed Zenitsu and Inosuke lurking nearby and gestured to the room. Now that they knew recovery training was possible and Tanjirou was leaving them in the dust, the rambunctious boys finally felt the need to catch up with their comrade’s progress.
Before long, the boys were well enough to continue the training on their own and (Y/n) found herself spending more and more time with Shinobu. They would spend hours talking or saying nothing at all, just enjoying each other’s company while they worked away on medicines and poisons.
It didn’t take long for (Y/n) to notice the difference. How Shinobu took up more than her fair share of space in (Y/n)’s thoughts. Even just catching sight of her across the garden was starting to make (Y/n)’s heart leap. On the occasion Shinobu would spot her she’d smile and wave, making (Y/n)’s heart stop all together before kicking into overdrive. The lingering touches and whispered words Shinobu would share with her as they worked in the lab certainly didn’t help either. Just when (Y/n) had thought they finally found their dynamic... Why was it changing again already?
(Y/n) was telling Naho, Sumi and Kiyo the story of how she met Tanjirou and Nezuko while she patted the demon’s head. Ever since Nezuko had woken up, the younger girls, though skittish at first, had grown to be fascinated and even enamored with her. As (Y/n) retold the tale, Nezuko humming happily at her side, Shinobu happened upon the group.
“I’m afraid we’ll have to cut this session short. Tanjirou and the others are ready to get back out on the road now. Something about joining Rengoku-san on his next mission.”
“How did I not here about this plan sooner?” (Y/n) frowned.
“That’s a question best suited for Tanjirou to answer I suppose.” Shinobu replied rather emotionlessly, concerning (Y/n).
So while everyone else was getting ready to leave, (Y/n) pulled Tanjirou aside and asked him what was going on.
“I didn’t tell you we were leaving because I hope you’ll stay and continue to rebuild the relationships you have here, (Y/n)-san. I appreciate everything you’ve done for Nezuko and I, and now I hope to return the favor.” Tanjirou smiled brightly.
“And how do you figure you’re doing that?” (Y/n) crossed her arms.
“Because the longer you get to stay here, the more time you get to spend with Shinobu-san! I can smell that you two want to be together more now than ever.”
“You and your nose I swear,” heat radiated off of (Y/n)’s cheeks, “I think you have intuition and that sense mixed up.”
Tanjirou merely laughed in response.
“So, you guys think you’ll really be okay without me? You’ll stay out of trouble?”
“Don’t worry, (Y/n)-san! We’ll see each other again soon!” Tanjirou beamed.
(Y/n) smiled in return and they rejoined the send off.
“Where did Shinobu-san go?” Tanjirou wondered.
(Y/n) looked around and sure enough, the Pillar was nowhere to be seen.
“She must have had something urgent to attend to,” she answered, making a note to search for her later.
(Y/n) stood out in the garden until the loud group disappeared into the trees and their shouts could no longer be heard over the rustling of the leaves. She took a moment to stare out into the clear blue sky before returning inside.
(Y/n) was going to go look for Shinobu, but she wanted to go to her room to change her uniform first since Zenitsu had snotted all over it in his tearful goodbye.
She opened the door and was surprised to find Shinobu already inside. Shinobu’s back was turned to her as she quickly ran a sleeve over her face. She cleared her throat before facing back with a weak smile.
“(Y/n), forget something?”
“Huh?” (Y/n) blinked, still trying to process why Shinobu might have just been tearing up in her room of all places.
“The others must be ready to leave now. You better pick up what you needed so they don't have to wait too long.”
“They already left, Shinobu.” (Y/n) explained. “I hadn’t planned on going with them.”
“Oh.” Shinobu turned to look outside the window of (Y/n)’s room, hoping the blood that buzzed in her cheeks hadn’t burned its way to her ears as well.
“Shinobu, is something wrong?” (Y/n) tested.
“I just feel a bit silly now I suppose.” Shinobu admitted, bringing a slight smile to (Y/n)’s face with her honesty. “I thought you were gone again.”
“Well, I wouldn’t leave without a proper goodbye, not again.” (Y/n) came up beside Shinobu, intending to give her hand a comforting squeeze when she felt something other than skin instead. Looking down she saw her old butterfly clip in Shinobu’s hand, a quick look at the empty spot at her desk confirmed it.
Shinobu noticed that (Y/n) had noticed and rose the hairclip up between them with a subdued exhale.
“You know, every morning I wonder if it will be the morning you feel comfortable enough to wear this again.” Shinobu said, twirling the insect in her fingers. “When I thought you were gone and I saw this still sitting on your desk, it brought me back to places I’d rather not think about.”
“I’m sorry,” (Y/n) rested her hand over the back of Shinobu’s haori, “I just haven’t felt... I don’t know, worthy of it? I didn’t intend to make you feel bad.”
A small puff of air left Shinobu’s nose at the words. “It isn’t a matter of worth, it’s about whether or not you feel like you belong here again. Whether or not you’re comfortable here.”
“Agree to disagree.” (Y/n) joked. “But if it makes you feel better, I’m glad I get to spend more time here. I’ve been happier in these last few weeks than in the last few years.”
“I’m glad.” Shinobu watched a couple of butterflies flutter against the window before turning back to the garden. “And if you insist on it being a matter of worth, you are more than worthy. It’s not even a question to me.”
“Thank you.” (Y/n) simpered. Her breathing hitched slightly when Shinobu reached up to run her fingers through a loose lock of (Y/n)’s hair.
“Would you let me do your hair?” Shinobu asked softly.
“I’d like that.” (Y/n) whispered.
Shinobu guided (Y/n) back to the desk and sat her down on the chair. She freed (Y/n)’s hair from its plain hair band and quietly ran a brush through her locks with such softness that (Y/n) felt like she might fall asleep. Shinobu gathered the hair in her hands and styled it as she wished, clipping it together with the butterfly hair clip. Shinobu checked over her work, her hands resting on (Y/n)’s shoulders.
“You look perfect.” (Y/n) shivered. She hadn’t expected Shinobu’s lips to be so close to her ear. Neither had she expected the lips to ghost over her cheek in a light kiss.
“I just remembered I have a meeting I need to attend. You’ll help the girls with the infirmary won’t you?”
(Y/n) had almost forgotten how to speak but managed to pull it together. “Of course! I’ll, um, see you when you get back?”
“Perhaps,” Shinobu removed her hands from (Y/n)’s shoulders, “I won’t be back until late though.”
“Okay.”
A shy hug (in slightly awkward positioning due to the gross state of the Kinoe’s uniform, courtesy of Zenitsu) and Shinobu parted ways with (Y/n). (Y/n) met up with the girls in the infirmary and was almost immediately met with a chorus of cheers from Naho, Kiyo and Sumi when they noticed her hair. Aoi and Kanao smiled at the sight as well. A full day of caring for the infirmary made (Y/n) excited to finally get into bed for the night.
She awoke with a scream caught in her throat. Old demons had visited her in her sleep. As she worked to calm her heart, she noticed the light of the full moon streaming through her window. With a few more deep breaths she sat up from her futon and wrapped her haori around her shoulders.
Quietly exiting her room, she padded through the halls until she found her way to the kitchen, a smile pulled at her lips when she found Shinobu already there boiling water.
“Rough night?” Shinobu asked. She was also in her bed wear, her hair hanging loose from its usual style.
“Yes,” (Y/n) moved to stand beside her, “it’s been awhile since the last one I had.”
“How did you deal with that when you were on the road?”
“I would buy little sacks of tea leaves as I went. On bad nights or whenever sleep eluded me I’d boil up some water and try a new blend. Yours was always the best though.”
“I was already going to make you a cup, no need for flattery.”
“No flattery here. Just the truth.” (Y/n) swore, making Shinobu’s smile just a tad fuller.
Shinobu finished preparing the cups and as (Y/n) took hers about ready to leave, the Hashira asked her to wait.
“It’s a full moon tonight. Want to watch the stars for a moment?” Shinobu asked.
“I’d love to.” (Y/n) nodded.
The pair walked outside along the engawa until they had a pleasant view of the full brightness of the moon. They sat along the engawa’s edge, letting their legs dangle as they sipped their tea in the drowning noise of cicada and cricket songs.
(Y/n) chanced a glance at Shinobu in her periphery and marveled at how the moonlight highlighted her skin to the point where she almost appeared to be glowing. The way it reflected off of her eyes was absolutely enchanting. (Y/n) forced her attention back on the sky. Though beautiful it seemed to pale in comparison to the girl next to her.
As her eyes traced over the larger craters of the moon, she thought back on an old saying she had read at one of the inns she had frequented. An old, battered collection of pages that she read through when sleep didn’t come. She had read that particular work quite a few times.
She wondered if perhaps Shinobu had read it too. Though more likely the girl had her face buried in medical texts than anything else. (Y/n) then wondered, if perhaps she could get away with saying it. A confession without consequence, but on the off change that Shinobu was knowledgeable on the old text it could damage the progress they had made in healing their relationship. Perhaps it would be better to just enjoy the moment. (Y/n) took another sip of tea.
“The moon is beautiful, isn’t it?”
(Y/n) nearly choked on her tea, spluttering and coughing as she tried in vein to stop herself. Finally she managed to calm down only to notice how intently Shinobu was staring at her.
Had she meant that literally? Shinobu was looking at (Y/n) so expectantly, but it could easily just be because she had nearly blacked out from inhaling her tea!
“...It is.” (Y/n) finally answered hiding her face in her cup, looking at neither Shinobu nor the moon.
Another long silence filled by the chirps of insects enjoying the humid night air. (Y/n) had finished her tea and set her cup to her right, her free hand that had been resting between Shinobu and herself was soon covered by a cool and calloused touch.
(Y/n) shyly turned her head to meet the Pillar’s gaze and jumped a bit when her nose unexpectedly brushed against Shinobu’s.
“The moon is beautiful tonight, isn’t it?” Shinobu repeated barely above a whisper. She was not pulling away.
(Y/n) felt her throat dry and she wished she had just one more swallow of tea left. With a slight quiver in her lips, she responded. Doing her best to stay focused on the purple irises before her.
“Yes,” she answered with a slight nod, careful not to bump head with Shinobu, “it is.”
“(Y/n)?” Shinobu called to her, cupping her face gently with the hand that wasn’t already resting on top of (Y/n)’s.
“Y.. yes?”
“Would you kiss me if I asked?” Shinobu murmured, filling (Y/n)’s senses with a dizzying wisteria scent. The slayer didn’t even try to talk herself out of answering such a query as the thumb of Shinobu’s hand swiped the corner of her lips.
“Yes.” She replied, nearly breathless already and her pupils blown wide.
“(Y/n), please kiss me.”
It was all too easy to lean in when they were already sitting so closely. The hand Shinobu had been using to cup her cheek weaved through the hair at the back of (Y/n)’s head, pulling her closer yet as their lips met a bit clumsily in buzzing, mind numbing bliss. (Y/n)’s free hand, the one not currently being clutched in a near death grip over the wooden floor, found home at the back of Shinobu’s neck, lightly massaging the skin there.
They broke apart a few times but the breaths they took were quick and few. Eventually they rested against each other while their abused lungs burned with a hunger for oxygen.
“I have wanted to do that for longer than I’d like to admit.” Shinobu quietly confessed, twisting a lock of (Y/n)’s hair though her fingers.
“Even when we were fighting?” (Y/n) joked, rubbing the back of Shinobu’s neck with her thumb.
“Strangely enough, yes. There were times when I thought about doing it just to shut you up. Though I didn’t dare allow myself to entertain the thought for long.”
(Y/n) chuckled and leaned in to steal another kiss, much less heated then the last few and much quicker as a chorus of surprised gasps made them pull apart and turn around.
“They kissed! They’re kissing!” Sumi cheered while Aoi tried to quiet her and push her back into the mansion.
Sumi and Kiyo emerged from the doorway that Shinobu had left open when she and (Y/n) first came out into the moonlight and were immediately hounding them for confirmation.
“We missed it! Do it again!” Kiyo pleaded.
“It’s like a fairy tale!” Naho cheered.
“You three!” Aoi grumbled with embarrassment. “Kanao, help me out here!”
Kanao looked between Aoi, the rowdy girls, then her sister and senpai, before settling on a nice golf clap of congratulations. This made Aoi lightly smack herself in the face and completely give up on trying to rein in the younger children.
“My, what are you all doing up I wonder?” Shinobu smiled.
“We wanted to watch the moon too Shinobu-sama! Aoi-san even made tea!” Naho clapped.
“But it’s clear you’re, busy, with something and we should go back inside.” Aoi rushed.
“Nonsense, it’s a lovely night. These things are best experienced with those you care about, don’t you all agree?”
“Yes!” Three excited voices readily agreed before wiggling in between the older girls with light blankets and their tea.
Aoi grumbled a half hearted reminder to be careful with the tea before sitting down beside (Y/n) with her own cup. Kanao took a seat beside Shinobu, lightly kicking her feet over the engawa as she started up silently at the moon.
They stayed up for hours, naming constellations, spotting shooting stars, and listening for the occasional loud croak of a far off frog in the thick of the cicadas and crickets.
Dawn wasn’t too far off when Naho, Sumi and Kiyo fell asleep. (Y/n), Shinobu and Kanao each picked one up and returned them to their rooms. Aoi gathered the discarded cups and helped with the doors before bidding the older girls goodnight, Kanao trailing behind her.
“What a lively night. I’m afraid chores will suffer tomorrow.” Shinobu mused as she walked (Y/n) back to her room.
“We’ll figure it out.” (Y/n) said, shyly brushing her hand against Shinobu’s and smiling when Shinobu laced their fingers together.
Once at (Y/n)’s room Shinobu raised (Y/n)’s hand to her lips with a smirk, planting a kiss on battle worn knuckles.
“This is where I leave you. I’ll see you in a few hours.”
“Why does that feel too long?” (Y/n) laughed quietly.
“I’m not sure, you’d think after four years of bitter silence a couple of hours would be a walk in the park.” Shinobu chuckled in return.
“I guess we just have a lot of time to make up for, huh?”
“Mm, that is a plausible line of reasoning,” Shinobu hummed, a spark growing in her eyes, “might I trouble you for one more kiss before I retire to my room?”
“I was hoping you’d ask.”
(Y/n) hardly got the words out before Shinobu was on her. Four kisses later and they pulled away with matching grins.
“I’ll see you in my dreams.” Shinobu added one last peck before pulling away.
“As will I.”
***
Well into the next morning (Y/n) awoke energized and ready to fight the world. She changed into a fresh uniform and pinned her hair with care, straightening the butterfly pin before rushing out of her room to begin her day with the young woman who had gifted it to her.
749 notes · View notes